Best Bathroom Scale

Best Bathroom Scale for Accuracy

We began our search for best bathroom scale by conducting a survey.  And, the findings of the survey garnered accuracy as the top requirement for the best bathroom scale.  Therefore, we began the beginnings of our search for the best bathroom scale with accuracy leading the way.

The next findings of our survey determined durability to be something consumers look for when buying a bathroom scale.  Therefore, a bathroom scale should live through the ups and downs and the loss and gains.  So, we combined accuracy with durability.

And, this pretty much narrowed down our options.  However, our final picks were further based on style and reviews.  So, those that looked great and had very happy consumers topped our final list.

Best Bathroom Scale

However, there are a few individualistic needs which you need to consider.  The first is minimum and maximum weight.  Is this scale going to be able to configure the weight for which you need it for?  Furthermore, if you’re looking for a scale which also detects your weight down to the decibel, this will help narrow down your options on our list.

The next individualistic need to consider is if a non-slip scale will be more appropriate for you.  Some consumers like to jump on the scale after the shower and that may get a little slick.  In addition, if you’re prone to slipping or there are little ones running around, a non-slip scale may be your best bet.

Finally, how’s your eyesight doing?  If you’re one who requires glasses or contacts, look for the largest display you can find.  And, this is because we don’t always have our glasses or contacts in, so a larger display will reduce the squinting it may take to read the darn display.

 

Best Bathroom Scale

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Greater Goods Weight Bathroom Scale
Greater Goods
Weight Bathroom Scale
Tempered Glass
Automatic
LCD Screen
Battery Operated
11.8" x 11.8" x 0.8"
Etekcity Digital Weight Bathroom Scale
Etekcity
Digital Weight Bathroom Scale
Tempered Glass
Automatic
LCD Screen
Battery Operated
12" x 12" x 0.9"
RENPHO Bluetooth Body Fat Scale
RENPHO
Bluetooth Body Fat Scale
Tempered Glass
Automatic
Bluetooth
App Compatible
LCD Screen
Battery Operated
Color Options
11" x 11" x 1"
Detecto D1130 Large Dial Bathroom Scale
Detecto
D1130 Large Dial Bathroom Scale
Metal
Vinyl
Dial
Slip Resistant
11.25" x 11.75" x 3'
Famili 271B Digital Bathroom Scale
Famili
271B Digital Bathroom Scale
Tempered Glass
Automatic
LCD Screen
Battery Operated
Slip Resistant
12" x 13" x 0.8"
Kinzi New Precision Digital Bathroom Scale
Kinzi
New Precision Digital Bathroom Scale
Tempered Glass
Automatic
LCD Screen
Battery Operated
Lbs/Kilos
11.8" x 11.8" x 0.8"
Greater Goods Silicone Digital Bathroom Weight Scale
Greater Goods
Silicone Digital Bathroom Weight Scale
Tempered Glass
Silicone
LCD Screen
Battery Operated
Slip Resistant
Color Options
12" x 12" x 0.9"
Greater Goods Wifi Smart Connected Body Fat Bathroom Scale
Greater Goods
Wifi Smart Connected Body Fat Bathroom Scale
Tempered Glass
Automatic
Wifi Connectivity
App Compatible
LCD Screen
Battery Operated
Color Options
12.6" x 12.6" x 0.9"

 

Best Bathroom Scale

Greater Goods Weight Bathroom Scale

Greater Goods Weight Bathroom Scale

Our first pick for best bathroom scale features an extra-large display, perfect for those who have compromising eyesight.  The Greater Goods Weight Bathroom Scale has an extra-large LCD screen illuminated by a backlight.  This is also great for those weighing-in during low light hours or in darker circumstances.

This bathroom scale is outfitted with a tempered glass top which is able to hold up to 400 pounds.  Tempered glass is ultra durable as it is 5 to 10 times stronger than regular glass.  Furthermore, this scale sits on 4 scratch-resistant and non-slip feet.  This will help protect your floors while keeping the scale stable for accuracy.

The Greater Goods Weight Bathroom Scale will measure weight from 11 pounds to 400 pounds.  In addition, it will measure your weight to the exact decimal point.

To use this scale, simply step right up.  And, it’s this easy because it runs on 2 lithium batteries which are replaceable.

Finally, the Greater Goods Weight Bathroom Scale is a soft grey color.  This subtle, yet sleek scale, will go with any decor without screaming scale.

Pros:

This scale is extremely responsive.  Furthermore, it is very accurate if you’re using it on a level floor.  If you’re using it on a not-so-level floor, you may see a few pounds difference.

In addition, the design and color of this scale make it a favorite amongst consumers as it is highly unobtrusive.

Lastly, this bathroom scale has one of the largest displays on our list.  So, if your eyesight is compromised, this may be one to consider.

Cons:

Although the Greater Goods Weight Bathroom Scale has non-slip feet, the tempered top does not offer any resistance to slipping.  Therefore, this may not be a great option for those with little ones running around or for those who are prone to slipping.

 

Etekcity Digital Weight Bathroom Scale

Etekcity Digital Weight Bathroom Scale

This next pick for best bathroom scale is another one with a tempered glass platform.  The Etekcity Digital Weight Bathroom Scale features 6 millimeters of tempered glass for ultra durability and for a maximum weight of 400 pounds.

This bathroom scale automatically powers off and automatically sets back to zero.  Furthermore, it will alert you when the battery is low and if the weight exceeds the maximum.

And, for those with less than desirable eyesight, this scale features a large, LCD display with a backlight for low-light situations.

The Etekcity Digital Weight Bathroom Scale will read weight from 11 to 400 pounds and down to the decimal.  And, this is calculated by 4 high-precision sensors for ultimate accuracy.

Finally, this bathroom scale runs on 2 1.5V AAA batteries which are included and replaceable.  Furthermore, because this scale automatically powers off, this will help to preserve the life of the batteries.

Pros:

Style-wise, this is another unobtrusive pick.  It is sleek and unassuming but looks fabulous.

In addition, the Etekcity Digital Weight Bathroom Scale is highly accurate, durable and easily readable.

Cons:

Because this scale has black tempered glass, you can see stains fairly easily.  So, to keep it looking pristine, you may be wiping it down often.

Furthermore, this scale has non-slip padding on the bottom.  However, the top platform is not slip-resistant.

RENPHO Bluetooth Body Fat Scale

RENPHO Bluetooth Body Fat Scale

If you’re looking to track your progress, this is a great option to consider.  The RENPHO Bluetooth Body Fat Scale works via Bluetooth with the Apple Health, Google Fit and Fitbit apps.  And, once you’re synced up, you can take your weight and it will connect to the apps without the need for your phone.

This body fat scale will display your body weight while data, like BMI and body fat percentage, is stored on the apps.  Furthermore, RENPHO offers its own app which will track the following 11 different metrics:  Body Weight, BMI, Body Fat Percentage, Water Percentage, Skeletal Muscle, Fat-Free Body Weight, Muscle Mass, Bone Mass, Protein, Basal Metabolism and Body Age.  In addition, the RENPHO Bluetooth Body Fat Scale can track unlimited users.

This body fat scale is made of 5 millimeters of tempered glass with a non-slip base and the maximum weight should not exceed 396 pounds.  This scale also measures in increments of 0.2 pounds, so you will get an accurate reading down to the decimal.

The RENPHO Bluetooth Body Fat Scale features a large LED display with a backlight.  This backlight will illuminate the weight measurement in low-light situations.

Finally, this body fat scale runs on 3 replaceable AAA batteries which are included.  And, the scale comes in your choice of colors:  Black or White.

Pros:

If you’re serious about getting healthy, this is a fantastic place to start.  The app will alert you to your progress, or for some of us, alert us to our transgressions.  Whatever the case may be, this reminder is like a fit buddy and will help us to stay on track.

Furthermore, this body fat scale is highly accurate and durable.

Cons:

For some people, the idea of connecting to an app is beyond comprehension.  However, the good news is, it’s rather easy.  And, once you get it down, it’s done.

That being said, some consumers felt the scale was accurate but the app was anything but.

 

Detecto D1130 Large Dial Bathroom Scale

Detecto D1130 Large Dial Bathroom Scale

If you’re looking to keep things simple, the Detecto D1130 Large Dial Bathroom Scale will allow you to do just that.

This pick for best bathroom scale features heavy-duty construction with a white enamel finish.  The platform consists of non-skid vinyl which will keep the scale stable and help prevent injuries due to slipping.

The Detecto D1130 Large Dial Bathroom Scale will support up to 300 pounds and will configure weight from 0 to 300 pounds.  Furthermore, this scale has a large dial which is easy to read.

Finally, the Detecto doesn’t need any batteries as it works like an old-fashioned scale.  So, just step on to get a reading and it’s all set for the next session.

Pros:

The Detecto D1130 Large Dial Bathroom Scale has a vintage look to it that will easily go with any decor.

Furthermore, we love the non-skid vinyl platform which is great for those who are prone to slipping.  Also, it doesn’t need any batteries which reduces hassle in the long run.

Cons:

Some consumers found the dial hard to read without glasses or contacts.  So, depending on how bad your eyesight is, you may want to take this into consideration.

 

Famili 271B Digital Bathroom Scale

Famili 271B Digital Bathroom Scale

This pick for best bathroom scale automatically turns on when you step on.  And, it automatically turns off once you step off.  The Famili 271B Digital Bathroom Scale runs via 2 AAA batteries which are included and replaceable.

This digital bathroom scale measures weight from 11 to 400 pounds.  In addition, it has a maximum platform weight of 400 pounds.

The Famili 271B Digital Bathroom Scale features a 0.8 inch thick plastic platform which sits on 4 rubber feet.  This plastic platform boasts a round nodule pattern which will prevent slipping.  Furthermore, the rubber feet will help keep the scale stable and from sliding around.

Finally, this digital bathroom scale has a large LCD display which is illuminated with a backlight.  This will help to see the results in low-light conditions.

Pros:

This scale pretty much checks everything off our list:  accuracy, durability, anti-slip, large display and automatic functions.

Furthermore, the Famili 271B Digital Bathroom Scale offers a great texture which is very comfortable to stand on.

Cons:

It seems some consumers received duds which gave inaccurate readings.  However, most consumers agree the customer service in this particular situation was beyond great.

 

Kinzi New Precision Digital Bathroom Scale

Kinzi New Precision Digital Bathroom Scale

This pick for best bathroom scale is one of the highest reviewed scale on our list.  The Kinzi New Precision Digital Bathroom Scale is also one of the thinnest scales on our list.  Furthermore, it comes with removable extension legs.  So, if you choose to add these legs, you can prop it up a bit.  Or, you can just leave it flat on the floor.

This digital bathroom scale measures weight from 9 to 400 pounds.  Therefore, the weight limit with this scale is set at 400 pounds.

The Kinzi New Precision Digital Bathroom Scale automatically turns on once you step on, and it automatically turns off once you step off.  This will help extend the life of the batteries.  And, speaking of batteries, this digital scale runs on 2 included Lithium batteries which are replaceable.

This digital bathroom scale features an extra-large LCD screen with a backlight.  This backlight will assist you in low-light conditions.

Finally, the Kinzi Digital Bathroom Scale is thin, sleek and an unobtrusive color which will work with just about every decor.

Pros:

Consumers love this bathroom scale.  It’s easy to use, features a modern design, it’s accurate and it’s easy to read.

Furthermore, if you’re looking for a bathroom scale which is able to measure other units of weight, the Kinzi New Precision Digital Bathroom Scale will also measure stones and kilograms.

Cons:

Some consumers received scales that gave inaccurate readings.  If this happens to you, be sure to contact the company.

In addition, this digital bathroom scale does not have a non-slip platform.

 

Greater Goods Silicone Digital Bathroom Weight Scale

Greater Goods Silicone Digital Bathroom Weight Scale

This is a fun one.  The Greater Goods Silicone Digital Bathroom Weight Scale comes with a scale and a Slate Gray silicone cover.  However, you can switch up the covers with your choice of the following purchased separately:  Aqua, Raspberry, Rose Quartz, Stone Grey or Wheat Grass.

This scale features a tempered glass platform and a silicone cover.  And, this silicone has a beveled pattern making it non-slip and skid-resistant.

The Greater Goods Silicone Digital Bathroom Weight Scale has a disappearing LED display.  Once you step on the platform, the display will shine through the silicone cover to reveal your weight.  And, once you step off, your weight disappears…if it could only be that easy. 🙂

The Greater Goods Silicone Digital Bathroom Weight Scale is able to measure in pounds or kilograms by a press of a button.  And, it will support and measure a weight of up to 400 pounds.

Finally, this digital bathroom scale runs on 4 AAA batteries which are included and replaceable.

Pros:

We are in love with the design of this scale and the fact that you can switch up the colors.  Furthermore, the silicone top is a nice touch as it offers a firm platform to keep things stable.

In addition, it is able to calculate kilograms and pounds, which very few scales on the US market have that feature.

Cons:

Some consumers claim to have received an inaccurate scale.  However, it is important to note that there are hundreds of satisfied consumers.  And, just be sure when using any scale, that you place it on a level surface.

 

Greater Goods Wifi Smart Connected Body Fat Bathroom Scale

Greater Goods Wifi Smart Connected Body Fat Bathroom Scale

Our final pick for best bathroom scale is another one that is compatible with major fitness apps.  The Greater Goods Wifi Smart Connected Body Fat Bathroom Scale will connect to apps like Apple Health, Google Fit, FitBit, MyFitnessPal, Amazon Echo and more.  And, this scale offers a free Weight Gurus app in which you and 7 other users can view your individual progress.  All you need is WiFi to connect your results to the app.

The Great Goods Wifi Smart Connected Body Fat Bathroom Scale measures weight, body fat, BMI, muscle mass, water weight and bone mass.  And, these results will show up on the scale, as well as the app.

This bathroom scale features a tempered glass platform which can hold up to 400 pounds.  And, it will record precise readings down to the decimal.

Furthermore, the bottom of this scale has non-slip, scratch-resistant feet.  This will help keep the scale stable while protecting the floors.

The Greater Goods Wifi Smart Connected Body Fat Bathroom Scale features an extra-large LCD screen with a backlight.  This backlight will help users see their results in low-light conditions.

Finally, this bathroom scale runs on 4 AAA batteries which are included and replaceable.  And, to preserve battery life, this scale will automatically turn on when you step on and turn off when you step off.

Pros:

Some of us just want the weight, body fat, BMI, muscle mass, water weight and bone mass readings without the app.  And, this scale does just that.  However, the app is fantastic if you want to track your results and give yourself something to celebrate.

Cons:

Some users had trouble getting past the Wifi setup.  And, after further research, it looks like an issue with the Wifi chip they received.  It’s important to note that most consumers received a good chip, however, if you’re one of the unlucky ones, make sure you contact the company.

Best Bean Bag Chair for Adults

Best Bean Bag Chair for Adults

So, you’re a big kid and you’re looking for the best bean bag chair for adults.  We get it, there’s absolutely nothing wrong with living out your childhood dreams.  In fact, it’s rather healthy to tap into your inner child and live out the basic desires we had as a kid.

Therefore, for the kid in all of us, we went on a treasure hunt for the best bean bag chair for adults.  And, we found some incredible picks that are a near-exact replica of the bean bags we grew up with.  However, we also found a few bean bags which are an innovative take on the age-old classic.

But, there are a few things to take into consideration when picking out the best bean bag chair for adults.  And this comes down to, which one is right for you?

First, everyone’s idea of comfort varies.  Therefore, take into consideration what type of lounging you will be doing.  Do you want to sink into the bean bag or do you want a more upright, posture-perfect position?  And the older we get, the less limber our bodies are.  So, depending on how your flexibility is treating you, you should pick out a bean bag accordingly.

Best Bean Bag Chair for Adults

Secondly, the other thing to consider is getting out of the bean bag.  If you’re looking at bad knees or an injury to your back, you may want to go with a bean bag which sits higher up off the ground.  This is so you’re able to get out of the bean bag without further injury yourself or putting unnecessary pressure on some rather sensitive parts.  So, if you’re prone to re-injuries, we do suggest a firmer, more upright bean bag.

Now that we’ve got the adulting out of the way, it’s time to talk about stuffing.  The stuffing is what makes the bean bag the “bean” bag.  However, when it comes to bean bags for adults, you will see a couple of different types of stuffing.  Some have beans while others have a memory foam filling.  So, please be cautious and keep in mind that not all fillings are beans.

Next, when choosing the best bean bag chair for adults, you will have plenty of options with the outer layer.  There are bean bags with a velvety smooth cover, classic cotton, polyester for easy maintenance or vinyl for some added style.  And, what you choose should be a reflection of your decor and the type of comfort you’re looking for.

Lastly, pick out the size that’s right for you.  Our final picks for best bean bag chair for adults come in all different sizes, with some catering to teens and smaller-sized adults, while others can hold 2 or 3 adults at a time.

 

Best Bean Bag Chair for Adults

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Flash Furniture Oversized Bean Bag Chair
Flash Furniture
Oversized Bean Bag Chair
Polystyrene Beads
Cotton Upholstery
Machine Washable
Color Options
42" x 42" x 19"
Lumaland Luxury 5-Foot Bean Bag Chair
Lumaland
Luxury 5-Foot Bean Bag Chair
Memory Foam
Micro Suede Upholstery
Machine Washable
Color Options
Size Options
3' - 7'
BeanBob Bean Bag Chair
BeanBob
Bean Bag Chair
Memory Foam
Polyester Upholstery
Machine Washable
Carrying Handle
Color Options
3' x 3' x 3'
Jaxx 6 Foot Cocoon Large Bean Bag Chair
Jaxx
6 Foot Cocoon Large Bean Bag Chair
Shredded Memory Foam
Micro Suede Upholstery
Machine Washable
Color Options
72” x 72” x 20”
Big Joe Milano Bean Bag Chair
Big Joe
Milano Bean Bag Chair
Polystyrene Beads
Upholstery Options
Color Options
32" x 28" 25"
Gold Medal Large Leather Look Tear Drop Bean Bag
Gold Medal
Large Leather Look Tear Drop Bean Bag
Polystyrene Beads
Vinyl Upholstery
Color Options
35" x 34" x 27"
Majestic Home Goods Classic Bean Bag Chair
Majestic Home Goods
Classic Bean Bag Chair
Polystyrene Beads
Polyester Upholstery
Indoor/Outdoor
UV Protected
Machine Washable
Color Options
28" x 28" x 22"

 

Best Bean Bag Chair for Adults

Flash Furniture Oversized Bean Bag Chair

Flash Furniture Oversized Bean Bag Chair

Our first pick for best bean bag chair for adults is as classic as you can get.  The Flash Furniture Oversized Bean Bag Chair is stuffed with foam beads which consists of breathable polystyrene.

And, this bean bag chair is covered with cotton upholstery which is removable and machine washable.  In addition, you can also wipe down this cotton  upholstery with a damp cloth if need be.

This Flash Furniture Bean Bag Chair is oversized which can accommodate kids and larger adults alike.  Measuring in at 42 inches long, 42 inches wide and 19 inches tall, this bean bag chair for adults can cater to just about everyone in the family.

Furthermore, the Flash Furniture Oversized Bean Bag Chair is rather light at approximately 10 pounds.  And, that makes this bean bag easy to transport from room to room.

Finally, with this bean bag, you get your choice of 16 different colors and some pattern options.  Choose from Camaflouge, Denim, Gray, Green Dot, Hot Pink, Lavender Dot, Light Pink Dot, Mint Green, Navy Blue, Purple, Red, Royal Blue, White Furry, Brown, Green or Pink.

Pros:

This bean bag is well made, comfortable, and for most adults, it is roomy enough to spread out.

Furthermore, it is easily adjustable to garner more back support if need be.

Cons:

While most consumers are happy with this purchase, some state this bean bag needs more filling.  Luckily that issue is easily solvable as you can purchase additional filling here.

Lumaland Luxury 5-Foot Bean Bag Chair

Lumaland Luxury 5-Foot Bean Bag Chair

If you’re looking for soft and luxurious, this is a pick to consider.  The Lumaland Luxury 5-Foot Bean Bag Chair has a micro suede cover that will keep you cozy and coddled.

This micro suede cover is removable to reveal a protective beige polyester cover.  So, while you’re machine washing your outer cover you can continue to lounge away.  Furthermore, this inner cover will allow for extra added protection against spills.

The Lumaland Luxury Bean Bag Chair is large in size and can comfortably fit 2 regular-sized adults.  Or, you can relax and spread out all by yourself.  It measures 48 inches long by 60 inches wide.

However, if you’re looking for something smaller or larger, you have your choice of sizes.  Choose between 3 feet, 4 feet, 5 feet, 6 feet or 7 feet.

This pick for best bean bag chair for adults is filled with high quality foam material designed to keep your body temperature regulated.  In addition, this foam retains memory so it will form to your body for ultimate comfort.  So, if you’re looking for the classic bean feel, you may want to check out some of our other picks.

The Lumaland Luxury Bean Bag Chair comes in 8 color options:  Black, Red, Brown, Navy Blue, Purple, Light Blue, Light Green or Dark Grey.

Pros:

Because this bean bag is made of memory foam, it will form to your shape.  So, if you’re looking for more support, this is one to consider.

Additionally, the Lumaland Luxury Bean Bag Chair comes in multiple sizes, so you may even be able to replace the couch if need be.

Cons:

Some consumers felt the memory foam was too stiff.  However, they may have been expecting the traditional beans.  So, make sure you know what you’re ordering with this one.

Furthermore, some consumers had issues with the dye of the outer cover bleeding onto their carpet and wood floor.  The best bet is to wash the outer cover a few times before using.

BeanBob Bean Bag Chair

BeanBob Bean Bag Chair

This pick for best bean bag chair for adults sits higher off the ground.  So, if you’re looking for an easy in and easy out, this is a contender.

The BeanBob Bean Bag Chair measures 3 feet by 3 feet by 3 feet.  So, it is large enough to fit just about every size of adult.

This bean bag chair for adults is filled with virgin foam.  Virgin foam is made of polyurethane and this particular foam will mold to the shape of your body.  Therefore, this bean bag chair will offer you extra support.

The BeanBob Bean Bag Chair comes with a removable outer cover.  This cover is machine washable to help keep the chair in pristine condition.

Finally, to easily transport this chair from room to room, it comes with a convenient carrying handle.

Pros:

Consumers agree, this bean bag is extremely durable.  In addition, it is a great product, especially for the price.

Cons:

If you’re looking for actual bean filling, you may want to check out some of our other picks.  The BeanBob Bean Bag Chair is filled with memory foam.

Jaxx 6 Foot Cocoon Large Bean Bag Chair

Jaxx 6 Foot Cocoon Large Bean Bag Chair

If you’re looking to spread out, this bean bag chair for adults will allow you to do just that.  However, it also allows you to sit in it like a regular ol’ bean bag by flipping it on its side. So, with this pick for best bag chair for adults, you get the best of both worlds.

The Jaxx 6 Foot Cocoon Large Bean Bag Chair features a micro-suede polyester cover which is removable, machine washable and dryable.  And, this cover is soft and comfy.  Therefore, if you’re looking for a luxurious cozy-feel, this chair is heaven.

This bean bag for adults contains shredded memory foam.  This will allow you to sink in the bag while the bag forms to the curves of your body.  So, if you’re unsure to go with beans or a foam bag, this is a great compromise.

Finally, the Jaxx 6 Foot Cocoon Large Bean Bag Chair comes in your choice of colors.  Choose between Aqua, Black, Camel, Charcoal, Chocolate, Cinnabar, Mandarin or Navy.

Pros:

This bean bag chair can hold up to 2 adults comfortably.  Furthermore, this bag is one of the more comfortable ones on the list due to the shredded memory foam.  This foam will also give you extra support.

In addition, we love that you can use this bag by spreading it out or propping it up in the traditional bean bag style.

Cons:

Some consumers complain that there isn’t enough foam filling.  However, it is important to note that most consumers are extremely happy.  And, as one consumer stated, you need to allow the foam plenty of time to expand after removing it from the packaging.

 

Big Joe Milano Bean Bag Chair

Big Joe Milano Bean Bag Chair

This bean bag chair really emphasises the chair part.  The Big Joe Milano Bean Bag Chair is designed just like a chair but with the bean feel.

This bean bag chair can accommodate children and adults alike.  It measures 32 inches long, 28 inches wide and 25 inches tall.  And, word on the street is it can accommodate larger-sized adults as well.

The Big Joe Milano Bean Bag Chair is outfitted with a soft, plush fabric.  However, there are many options when it comes to this chair.  You can choose between parachute-like material, vinyl-like material, plush and even a shag.  Furthermore, just follow this link and you will find never-ending color options.

This pick for best bean bag chair for adults is filled with UltimaX Beans.  These beans are refillable and you can find the refills here.  UltimaX Beans are made of virgin polystyrene and are 100% recyclable.  Furthermore, these beans are small, dense and long-lasting.  

Finally, the outer cover of the Big Joe Milano Bean Bag Chair is double-stitched and comes with 2 safety locking zippers.  This will help ensure the beans stay where they’re intended to stay.

Pros:

The Big Joe Milano Bean Bag Chair is extremely well made and durable.  And, if you’re looking for back support, this is an excellent option.

Furthermore, since it sits higher off the ground, it’s easy to get in and out of.

Cons:

The cover is not removable, therefore, you can’t machine wash it.  However, this bean bag chair cleans up nicely with a damp cloth.

 

Gold Medal Large Leather Look Tear Drop Bean Bag

Gold Medal Large Leather Look Tear Drop Bean Bag

If you’re into the retro look, the Gold Medal Large Tear Drop Bean Bag is as retro as you’re going to get.  And, this will not only go with the retro type of decor but it can easily slide in with a modern style of decor.

This bean bag is outfitted with vinyl and filled with virgin polystyrene beans.  The vinyl covering is double stitched and comes with a child safe zipper to keep the beans inside the bag where they belong.  Furthermore, the vinyl is durable and cleanup is as easy as wiping it down with a damp cloth.

The Gold Medal Large Tear Drop Bean Bag measures 35 inches long, 34 inches wide and 27 inches tall.  And, because of the tear drop shape, it provides back support and an easier exit than traditional shaped bean bags.

Lastly, you get your choice of colors.  Choose between Black, Cobblestone, Green, Hot Pink, Medium Blue, Navy, Purple, Scarlet or Wine.

Pros:

We love the style of this particular bean bag.  And, we mentioned it can go with retro and modern decor, however, we can also see it fitting right in with a western style of decor and even country.

Furthermore, this bean bag is durable and the vinyl is tough.  So, expect this bag to last a while.

Cons:

Some consumers felt this bag didn’t have enough filling.  However, you can purchase extra filling here.

Majestic Home Goods Classic Bean Bag Chair

Majestic Home Goods Classic Bean Bag Chair

Our final pick for best bean bag chair for adults can work both indoors and outdoors.  The Majestic Home Goods Classic Bean Bag Chair features a UV protected outer cover made of polyester.  Furthermore, the polyester is high quality and ultra durable.  And, the good news is, this outer cover is removable and machine washable.

This bean bag chair also comes with an inner cotton cover.  This cover helps keep the beans in place.  And, speaking of beans, the Majestic Home Goods Classic Bean Bag Chair is filled with polystyrene beans which are 50% recycled.

This bean bag chair best accommodates teens and smaller-sized adults.  The measurements run 28 inches long, 28 inches wide and 22 inches tall.  And, this chair weighs approximately 7 pounds.

Lastly, the Majestic Home Goods Classic Bean Bag Chair comes in your choice of colors:  Sage Green, Black, Chocolate Brown, Gray, Navy Blue, Pink, Yellow, Burnt Orange, Sage Red, Teal Blue or Tiffany Blue.

Pros:

This bean bag chair is a classic choice all around.  In addition, it comes with the classic Chevron print which can add some extra needed pop to any room.

Cons:

Some consumers feel the fabric is rather uncomfortable and the feel of the chair is stiff.  So, if you’re looking for more support, the fact that this chair is on the stiff side may be a good thing.

And, this chair is on the smaller side, with some consumers stating “it’s smaller than expected.”

 

Best Belgian Waffle Makers

7 Best Belgian Waffle Makers

So, how do you like your waffles?  Answering this question will determine which of these 7 best Belgian waffle makers are right for you.  And, just like chefs, each of these waffle makers have their own individualistic style of cooking.

Do you like deep dish waffles?  How about lightly browned waffles with a crispy outer texture?  Or, how about fluffy waffles or flat as a pancake waffles?  Our picks for best Belgian waffle makers has something for everyone.

Best Belgian Waffle Makers

In addition, each of these waffle makers vary on how many waffles you can make at one time.  So, if you’re feeding a family of 6, you may want to consider cooking in bulk and choosing a waffle maker accordingly.  If you’re cooking for one, you may want to consider going with a 2 slice waffle maker or you maybe even want to check out the waffle iron which cooks right on the stove top.

So, whatever your taste may be, you can find it on our list.  Furthermore, each of these picks for 8 best Belgian waffle makers are highly regarded amongst consumers and they have the reviews to back them up.

 

Best Belgian Waffle Makers

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Cuisinart WAF-300 Belgian Waffle Maker
Cuisinart
WAF-300 Belgian Waffle Maker
4-Slice Waffle Plates
4-Slot Pancake Plate
6 Temperature Controls
Indicator Lights
Indicator Alert
Removable Plates
9.7" x 12.2" x 6.3"
KRUPS 8000035972 GQ502D Adjustable Temperature Belgian Waffle Maker
KRUPS
8000035972 GQ502D Adjustable Temperature Belgian Waffle Maker
4-Slice Waffle Plates
5 Temperature Controls
Indicator Lights
Indicator Alert
Removable Plates
12.6" x 6.7" x 16.5"
Cuisinart WAF-F20 Double Belgian Waffle Maker
Cuisinart
WAF-F20 Double Belgian Waffle Maker
2 x 4-Slice Waffle Plates
6 Temperature Controls
180 Degree Rotation
Indicator Lights
Indicator Alert
10.6" x 16.5" x 10.2"
Breville The Smart 4-Slice Waffle Maker
Breville
The Smart 4-Slice Waffle Maker
4-Slice Waffle Plates
12 Temperature Controls
Batter Settings
Indicator Lights
Indicator Alert
15.8" x 8.8" x 18.5"
Oster 1-1/2 Inch Thick Belgian Flip Waffle Maker
Oster
1-1/2 Inch Thick Belgian Flip Waffle Maker
4-Slice Waffle Plates
Temperature Controls
180 Degree Rotation
Indicator Lights
Drip Tray
14.3" x 5.8" x 10.4"
NordicWare 15040 Cast Aluminum Stovetop Belgium Waffle Iron
NordicWare
15040 Cast Aluminum Stovetop Belgium Waffle Iron
4-Slice Waffle Plates
PFOA-Free
17" x 8" x 2"
Hamilton Beach Flip Belgian Waffle Maker
Hamilton Beach
Flip Belgian Waffle Maker
4-Slice Waffle Plates
3 Temperature Controls
180 Degree Rotation
Indicator Lights
Drip Tray
14.9" x 9.9" x 9.1"

 

Best Belgian Waffle Makers

Cuisinart WAF-300 Belgian Waffle Maker

Cuisinart WAF-300 Belgian Waffle Maker

Our first pick on our list for best Belgian waffle makers will whip up some thick and fluffy waffles.  And not only can the Cuisinart WAF-300 Belgian Waffle Maker cook some incredible waffles in a 4-slice Belgian waffle plate.  In addition, it also comes with a 4-slot pancake plate to switch things up a bit.  So, if you have a family of 1 to 4 people, this size of waffle maker should suit you just fine.

The Cuisinart WAF-300 Belgian Waffle Maker features 6 temperature controls.  If you would like your waffles on the fluffier side, use settings 1 through 3.  If you’re looking for a crispier outer layer, use the higher settings.  And, speaking of fluffy, this waffle plate is deep enough to make 1 to 1-1/2 inch thick waffles.

Cooking with the Cuisinart is simple.  Once the waffle maker reaches its cooking temperature, a “Ready to Bake” indicator light will alert you to pour in the waffle or pancake mixture.  And, once its finished cooking according to your desired setting, the “Ready to Eat” indicator will light up and you will hear an unmistakable beep alerting you to some fresh-baked heaven.  Time to dish up.

The Cuisinart WAF-300 features non stick removable plates which are dishwasher safe.  Furthermore, this Belgian waffle maker has an attractive brushed steel outer layer which will fit in flawlessly with any decor.

Finally, for easy storing until the next waffle showdown, this Belgian waffle maker has the capacity to sit upright.  And this works well when storing in cupboards as it saves precious room.

Pros:

Because the Cuisinart WAF-300 Belgian Waffle Maker comes with a pancake plate, this also can be used for grilled sandwiches and paninis.

In addition, this waffle maker cooks rather fast with each waffle taking roughly 2 to 3 minutes.

Cons:

Although this Belgian waffle maker cooks rather fast, it takes almost 3 times as long to heat up.

Furthermore, some consumers felt this Belgian waffle maker looked durable, but found it to be flimsy in construction.

Lastly, the Cuisinart Belgian Waffle Maker doesn’t come with a handle lock so the top can fly open if not handled properly.

KRUPS 8000035972 GQ502D Adjustable Temperature Belgian Waffle Maker

KRUPS 8000035972 GQ502D Adjustable Temperature Belgian Waffle Maker

This next pick on our list of best Belgian waffle makers is for those of us who are craving Belgian waffles that are on the thinner side.  The KRUPS Belgian Waffle Maker can cook up to 4 slices of Belgian waffles at one time.  And, at this rate, this is great for a household of up to 4 people.

This Belgian waffle maker features 5 adjustable browning settings which you can set from light to dark.  And, it has red and green indicator lights to let you know when the waffle maker is on, when it’s ready for the waffle mixture and when it’s ready for consumption.  In addition, each of these stages in the process comes with a beep so you can audibly hear when each stage is complete.

The KRUPS Adjustable Temperature Belgian Waffle Maker comes with removable die-cast plates with non stick coating.  Die-cast is simply the process in which these plates are made.  The metal is poured into a cast under high pressure until it forms into a mold.  These plates are removable and dishwasher safe for easy cleaning.

Finally, this Belgian waffle maker will look great in just about any kitchen as it is made of stainless steel.  And, once you’re ready to store it, it has a convenient cord wrap and a handle lock to keep things secure.

Pros:

This pick on our list for best waffles makers is a great waffle maker for the price.

And, it comes with 5 browning settings so you can get the perfect amount of crispiness.

Cons:

If you’re looking for real Belgian waffles, these waffles might disappoint you as they are much thinner than the real deal.

Cuisinart WAF-F20 Double Belgian Waffle Maker

Cuisinart WAF-F20 Double Belgian Waffle Maker

This Belgian waffle maker was rated the best Belgian waffle maker by America’s Test Kitchen.  Now, we consider ourselves to be experts but America’s Test Kitchen always has the final say.  So, the experts have spoken and this is the best Belgian waffle maker money can buy.

Furthermore, this Belgian waffle maker is made with durability and quality.  The outside of the waffle maker features stainless steel with non stick waffle plates on the inside.  However, it is important to note that these waffle plates are not removable, so cleanup will be a bit more tedious.

The Cuisinart WAF-F20 Double Belgian Waffle Maker can cook 2 4-slice Belgian waffles at once.  So, if you’re looking to feed a lot of people then this is a pick to consider.  

This waffle maker cooks up to 1-inch Belgian waffles with deep pockets.  In addition, it has 6 settings where you can control your desired level of crispiness.

Finally, the Cuisinart features a 180 degree rotation so the waffles bake more evenly.  And, once the desired time is up, there is an indicator light and 3 consecutive beeps to let you know breakfast is served.

Pros:

This pick on our list for best Belgian waffle makers is a fun one.  It makes you feel as if you’re a part of the process as you flip the waffles over to create a more thorough and evenly baked waffle.

Furthermore, the Cuisinart WAF-F20 Double Belgian Waffle Maker bakes 2 waffles at a time.  And, this is great for households both large and small.  If you’re cooking just for yourself, have seconds!  However, if you just want to cook one waffle at a time, you can do that too.

Cons:

The waffle plates are not removable which makes cleanup a bit more difficult.

 

Breville The Smart 4-Slice Waffle Maker

Breville The Smart 4-Slice Waffle Maker

Many consumers agree, this bakes the real McCoy, true deep dish Belgian waffles.  So, if you’re looking for some fluffy heaven-like Belgian waffles, this is a pick to consider.

In addition, The Smart 4-Slice Waffle Maker by Breville has 12 heat settings so you can control, in near detail, your desired amount of crispiness.  And, you can also specify the batter type to achieve an even more custom baking experience.  These batter types include Belgian, Classic, Chocolate and Buttermilk.

This pick for best Belgian waffle maker is made of stainless steel on the outside and non stick cast aluminum waffle plates on the inside.  Furthermore, these plates are surrounded by a moat to catch any overflow.

The baking begins when you close the top lid.  Once the waffles are done, an indicator light and an audible alert will let you know when breakfast is ready.  Once the waffle is done, this waffle maker will stop cooking on its own.

Finally, just like its name, The Smart 4-Slice Waffle Maker by Breville bakes 4 waffles at a time.  So, if you’re hungry or you’re feeding a large family, this is a great option to consider.

Pros:

If you want true Belgian waffles, go to Belgium.  Or, you can purchase The Smart 4-Slice Waffle Maker by Breville.  These are true, deep-dish Belgian waffles.

Furthermore, this pick on our list of best Belgian waffle makers has the most settings.  So, you can achieve your desired crispiness in near detail.

Cons:

The waffle plates are not removable which will make cleanup a bit more tedious.

Oster 1-1/2 Inch Thick Belgian Flip Waffle Maker

Oster 1-1/2 Inch Thick Belgian Flip Waffle Maker

If you’re on a budget, this is a great pick to consider.  The Oster 1-1/2 Inch Thick Belgian Flip Waffle Maker is not only low on price, but it’s also a space-saving waffle maker.  And, when storing this waffle maker, it stands vertically to save precious space in the cupboard.

This Belgian waffle maker is another pick on our list of best Belgian waffle makers that features the flip operation.  This is great for cooking waffles more thoroughly and evenly.

The Oster Belgian Flip Waffle Maker comes with a 1-1/2 inch thick, non stick surface.  And, if you’re looking for thick Belgian waffles, this is one of the thickest on our list.

Furthermore, if you like your waffles crispy, this waffle maker features an adjustable temperature control to cater to your desire.  Once the temperature control is set, this waffle maker heats up quickly.

Lastly, the Oster 1-1/2 Inch Thick Belgian Flip Waffle Maker has a removable drip tray for easy cleanup.

Pros:

For the price, this is a decent machine which cooks exceptional waffles.  So, if you’re not ready to throw down some money on a higher end Belgian waffle maker, this should fuel your appetite in the meantime.

Cons:

The Oster Belgian Flip Waffle Maker is rather difficult to clean as the plates aren’t removable.  Best case scenario, purchase a small soft-head scrub or even a toothbrush to help you reach between the grates.

NordicWare 15040 Cast Aluminum Stovetop Belgium Waffle Iron

NordicWare 15040 Cast Aluminum Stovetop Belgium Waffle Iron

Sometimes simple is better and sometimes cooking Belgian waffles the old-fashioned way is even better.  The NordicWare 15040 Cast Aluminum Stovetop Belgium Waffle Iron comes from a company that was founded in 1946 and who are still manufacturing most of their products in Minneapolis.  And, this company also won the 2015 Minnesota Manufacturing Award for Sustainability.  So, it’s a true salt of the earth company.

The NordicWare 15040 Cast Aluminum Stovetop Belgium Waffle Iron is made of PFOA-free non stick coated cast aluminum.  And, essentially, PFOA means Teflon-free.

This Belgian waffle maker simply works on the stove.  To get the waffles cooking, just preheat the waffle iron on both sides.  Pour in the batter and cook for 30 seconds on one side and 2 to 3 minutes on the other side.  The good news is, the handle stays cool while the waffles are cooking.  Once the waffles are finished, 4 delicious waffles easily go from the iron and onto your plate.

Pros:

This is a definitely a pick to consider, even if you came here looking for an electric Belgian waffle maker.  This company has long-standing values that coincide historically as well as environmentally.  And, they make high quality products.

Furthermore, the NordicWare 15040 Cast Aluminum Stovetop Belgium Waffle Iron cooks up some decadent, crispy waffles that melt in your mouth.

Cons:

This waffle iron takes a little more work than its electric counterparts.  Not much, but a little.  However, these waffles are worth it.

Hamilton Beach Flip Belgian Waffle Maker

Hamilton Beach Flip Belgian Waffle Maker

The final pick on our list of best Belgian waffle makers is one that cooks thick and fluffy waffles.  In addition, the outside will get nice and crispy.

However, what differentiates this flip waffle maker from the others on our list is the waffle plates are removable for easy cleanup.  So, if you’re set on a flip waffle maker but insist on removable plates, this is a contender.

The Hamilton Beach Flip Belgian Waffle Maker is made of stainless steel with non stick waffle plates and a removable drip tray.  Furthermore, the waffle plates and drip tray are dishwasher safe.

This waffle maker has 3 browning settings to help achieve your desired crispiness.  Once the desired cook time is set, a ready light will come on to alert it’s time to add the batter.  Then, lock the batter in place and the waffles are closer to being on your plate.  After about 5 to 8 minutes, depending on how crispy you like your waffles, breakfast is served.

Finally, when flipping the waffles, the Hamilton Beach Flip Belgian Waffle Maker features a cool-touch handle.  And, this cool-touch handle folds down for easy storage.

Pros:

The Hamilton Beach Flip Belgian Waffle Maker is the best flip waffle maker if you require removable trays.  Furthermore, this waffle maker is extra easy to clean as it also comes with a drip tray to prevent overflow.  And, the waffle trays and drip tray are both dishwasher safe. 

Cons:

This waffle maker doesn’t come with an audible alert to let you know the waffles are ready.  So, to prevent overcooking, you will need to keep a close eye on them.

In addition, some consumers felt this waffle maker doesn’t cook waffles very evenly.  Therefore, you may want to flip more times than normal in order to get a more evenly cooked waffle.

Best Spin Mop

Best Spin Mop for Small and Large Spaces

If you’re looking for the best spin mop, there are a variety of options you have when choosing the best spin mop for your lifestyle.  And, we found an array of options that will work for you, whatever your scenario may be.

But first, let’s go over some of the options you have in store.  While most of our picks are manual, we have a battery-operated spin mop that will do the work for you.  Sounds like a great plan, right?

However, if you’re looking for something more basic, we have 6 manual spin mops to choose from.  And, most people tend to choose the best spin mop that’s appropriate for their space.  So, if you’re working with a small space, it’s best to go with a smaller bucket.  If you’re looking to spick and span a larger space, you will want to go with a larger bucket.

Best Spin Mop

In addition, when it comes to the larger buckets, some of our picks come with wheels.  Therefore, its less strain on your back and joints.  So, space is also something to take into consideration when choosing a bucket that has wheels.  If you have a larger space to work with, wheels will probably be the most pragmatic choice.

Another aspect consumers run into when choosing a spin mop is storage space.  So, before biting the bullet and choosing the largest spin mop on our list, make sure you have room to tuck it away when the mopping duty is done.

You may also have a situation where you would like to warn others of the dangers of a wet floor.  Therefore, we included a bucket that has the traditional warning sign letting others know there is danger ahead.

Other options some of our final picks possess are splash guard, foot pedal, soap dispenser and adjustable handle.  However, all of our manual picks offer the much desired built-in wringer.

So, take a browse around and get to the know these tools that are designed to make your life a whole lot easier and cleaner.

 

Best Spin Mop

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
O-Cedar EasyWring Microfiber Spin Mop and Bucket Floor Cleaning System
O-Cedar
EasyWring Microfiber Spin Mop and Bucket Floor Cleaning System
Microfiber Mop Head
Built-In Wringer
Foot Pedal
Easy-Control Water Release
Splash Guard
Angled Mop Head
360 Degree Rotation
Machine Washable
19.5" x 11.7" x 11.5"
5.38 lbs
Hapinnex Spinning Mop Bucket Set
Hapinnex
Spinning Mop Bucket Set
Stainless Steel
Microfiber Mop Head
Built-In Wringer
Self-Balancing
Easy-Press System
Splash Guard
360 Degree Swivel
Latch Lock
Drain Plug
18.1" x 9.1" x 10.2"
3.99 lbs
Bissell Spinwave Cordless Hard Floor Mop
Bissell
Spinwave Cordless Hard Floor Mop
Cordless
Battery Operated
Soft Touch Pads
Scrubby Pads
On-Demand Spray
Swivel Steering
16" x 8" x 45"
14.1 lbs
Finether Single Bucket Spin Mop Cleaning System
Finether
Single Bucket Spin Mop Cleaning System
Microfiber Mop Head
Stainless Steel
Built-In Wringer
2-in-1 System
Easy Pour Outlet
12" x 12" x 12"
7.9 lbs
CycloMop Commercial Spinning Wet & Dry Mop
CycloMop
Commercial Spinning Wet & Dry Mop
Stainless Steel
Microfiber Mop Head
Built-In Wringer
Foot Pedal
Drain Plug
21" x 12" x 11.5"
10 lbs
RoMop Easy to Go Stainless Steel Deluxe Rolling Spin Mop
RoMop
Easy to Go Stainless Steel Deluxe Rolling Spin Mop
Stainless Steel
Microfiber Mop Head
Chenille Mop Head
Scrub Mop Head
Built-In Wringer
Drain Plug
Wheels
19.5" x 13.8" x 11.5"
7.4 lbs
Mopnado Stainless Steel Deluxe Rolling Spin Mop
Mopnado
Stainless Steel Deluxe Rolling Spin Mop
Stainless Steel
Microfiber Mop Head
Scrub Mop Head
Built-In Wringer
Soap Dispenser
Wheels
20" x 14" x 11.5"
9.9 lbs

 

Best Spin Mop

 

O-Cedar EasyWring Microfiber Spin Mop and Bucket Floor Cleaning System

O-Cedar EasyWring Microfiber Spin Mop and Bucket Floor Cleaning System

Our first pick on our list for best spin mop is one of the most highly reviewed mops out there.  The O-Cedar EasyWring Spin Mop and Bucket Cleaning System has a pretty impressive list of features that make cleaning much easier.

However, it is important to note that the bucket does not come with wheels.  So, if you don’t mind carrying the bucket from room to room or you’re working with a smaller space, this is an option to consider.  If you’re looking to wheel a bucket around as the task at hand is rather large, you may want to consider some of our other options.

The O-Cedar EasyWring Spin Mop and Bucket Cleaning System features a built-in wringer.  And, this wringer works by simply stepping on the foot pedal.  This foot pedal also controls how saturated you want the mop.  So, if you’re looking for a saturated mop, just push down on the pedal once.  If you’re looking for a damp mop, push down on the pedal 5 times and so on.

And to keep things tidy, the bucket features a splash guard.  So, when you’re ringing out the mop, the water stays where it should – inside the bucket.

This spin mop is made of microfiber which is suitable for all hard surface floors, including wood floors.  Microfiber is gentle enough so it doesn’t scratch the surface of the floor, but it is tough enough to remove dirt and grime.

In addition, this spin mop features a mop head in the shape of a triangle.  This will ensure you reach those corners adequately and efficiently.  And, it has a flexible mop head which rotates in a 360 degree motion to reach just about anywhere.

Finally, this mop head is machine washable and we recommend you let it air dry.  Also, it is recommended you replace the mop head every 3-6 months.  Of course, this depends on how often you will be using the mop.

Pros:

This spin mop is one of the most highly reviewed mops on the market.  And this means thousands of satisfied consumers.  The O-Cedar EasyWring Spin Mop and Bucket Floor Cleaning System has just about every feature you could imagine with a mop.

Cons:

Although most consumers are happy with this product, there are some consumers who state this mop broke after a few months of use.

In addition, if you’re looking for a mop with wheels, this is probably the only feature this mop is lacking.

Lastly, some consumers have complained the mop is rather short in size.  So, if you’re on the tall side, you may want to check out another option.

 

Hapinnex Spinning Mop Bucket Set

Hapinnex Spinning Mop Bucket Set

This spin mop touts a self-balanced bucket.  So, if you are looking for extra security to make sure the water stays inside the bucket as intended, this an option to consider.  And, along with the self-balanced bucket feature, this spin mop also features a detachable splash guard.

The Hapinnex Spinning Mop Bucket Set features a 360 degree swivel head and rotates up to 180 degrees to clean under hard to reach areas.  And, attached to the swivel head is a washable and replaceable microfiber mop head.  Microfiber is gentle enough to work on all hard-surfaced floors including wood floors as it will not scratch the surface.

This spin mop works by way of an Easy-Press system.  Just push down on the handle and this will activate the spinning mechanism.  If you would like to wring the mop out further, just give it another push.

However, the one thing to consider with this particular spin mop is it doesn’t come with wheels.  So, if you’re working with a smaller space, this may be suitable for you.  If you’re working with a larger space, you may want to check out our other picks which offer wheels.

The Hapinnex Spinning Mop Bucket Set is made with plastic and stainless steel.  Therefore, this mop is more durable than their all-plastic counterparts.

And speaking of durability, this spin mop comes with a latch lock.  This will help secure the length of the pole to avoid a rather awkward mopping session.

Finally, the mop bucket features a convenient drain plug which sits towards the bottom of the bucket.  This is a great feature for easy draining, especially when you have a bucket full of dirty water.

Pros:

This pick for best spin mop is a great choice for smaller spaces.  And, because it features a self-balanced bucket, this will greatly reduce the awkwardness when carrying this bucket from point A to point B.

In addition, we love the drain plug included with this bucket.  It makes the job of emptying the bucket so much more fluid.

Cons:

This is another pick which doesn’t come with wheels.  However, for a lot of people, this isn’t necessary.

And, a few consumers have complained that the mop handle fell apart after a few uses.  It is important to note, though, that the majority of consumers are very satisfied with their purchase.

 

Bissell Spinwave Cordless Hard Floor Mop

Bissell Spinwave Cordless Hard Floor Mop

This is perhaps the easiest spin mop you can own.  The Bissell Spinwave Cordless Hard Floor Mop pretty much does the work for you.  It runs on 18 volts of Lithium ion batteries to clean for up to 20 minutes.

And because it runs on batteries, it is cordless.  So no switching outlets, no getting the cord trapped in the doorway, it’s just mop and go.

The Bissell Spinwave Cordless Hard Floor Mop works on all hard-surfaced floors that are sealed.  This includes wood, tile, linoleum and marble floors, to name a few.

This battery-operated spin mop comes with soft touch pads for a gentle clean or scrubby pads for a more thorough cleaning.  Furthermore, these pads are machine washable and dryable.

To operate the Bissell Spinwave Cordless Hard Floor Mop, simply fill the tank with the cleaning solution, spray the desired amount of solution onto the floor by way of the On-Demand spray system and power the mop on.  This spin mop essentially does the rest.

Pros:

This pick for best spin mop is, by far, the easiest way to mop the floors.  And, there’s not even any pushing involved as this mop just glides on its own.

Furthermore, the Bissell Spinwave is lightweight, easy to maneuver and comes equipped with swivel steering.  This will help to mop those hard to reach places.

Cons:

Although this battery-operated spin mop is easy to maneuver, some hard to reach areas are just too hard to reach.  For instance, behind the toilet or in narrower passageways.

In addition, some consumers complain this mop doesn’t apply enough pressure.  So, if you’re mopping up after kids or dogs, you may want to go the more manual route and check out some of our other options on this list.

 

Finether Single Bucket Spin Mop Cleaning System

Finether Single Bucket Spin Mop Cleaning System

This is a great option for those with limited space as it’s the smallest spin mop cleaning system on our list.  So, this would work for those who live in a small-sized apartment and/or for those who have limited storage space.

The Finether Single Bucket Spin Mop Cleaning System is made primarily of stainless steel, so this mop is durable and will likely last you a while.  Furthermore, the stainless steel is rust proof for added longevity.

This spin mop features a 2-in-1 design where the dirty deed of mopping can be done in one basket.  Simply fill the bucket and insert the mop.  Then, push the handle down on the mop until it clicks.  Once the mop is locked into the basket, pull up on the handle and the basket is raised above the water and ready to wring.

The Finether Single Bucket Spin Mop features a microfiber, yarn-like mop which sits at a low-profile position to clean hard to reach areas.  Furthermore, because it is made of microfiber, this is safe to use on all hard-surfaced floors including wood floors.

Finally, once you’re finished mopping, the bucket has an easy pour outlet on the side to rid the dirty water without making a mess.

Pros:

This pick for best spin mop is a great solution for those with a small space.

Furthermore, because this mop is made with rust-proof stainless steel, this spin mop cleaning system should last you a while.

Cons:

A couple of consumers complained about the bucket leaking.  Also, a couple of consumers found this mop not to be user-friendly as it is hard to maneuver it in and out of the bucket.

 

CycloMop Commercial Spinning Wet & Dry Mop

CycloMop Commercial Spinning Wet & Dry Mop

If you’re mopping a space that it utilized by a lot of people, it may be wise to consider giving people a warning that there is wet floor ahead.  The CycloMop Commercial Spinning Wet & Dry Mop features a hard-to-miss caution sign with the traditional yellow color.

And, this commercial spin mop is built-in typical commercial fashion, which is built to last.  The bucket is made of hard plastic with a stainless steel spinner.  And, the mop handle is made of a lightweight metal material.

The CycloMop Commercial Spinning Wet & Dry Mop features a microfiber, yarn-like mop head which is ultra absorbent.  It is also machine washable and replaceable.

To use this commercial spin mop, simply fill the bucket, dip the mop and spin away using the foot pedal.  And, you also have your choice of saturation level.  If you want less water on the mop head, tap the pedal 5 times.  If you want less, just tap once.

Finally, this pick for best spin mop comes with a drainage spout towards the bottom of the bucket.  And this keeps things relatively clean when draining the dirty water after the deed.

Pros:

This spin mop is well made and will last a long time.  Furthermore, this mop bucket gives a clear warning to help prevent accidents.

Cons:

This is one pick that should have wheels but doesn’t.  In addition, some consumers found the bucket rather heavy to lug around.

Lastly, some consumers find the mop isn’t that mobile which makes it hard to clean hard to reach areas.

 

RoMop Easy to Go Stainless Steel Deluxe Rolling Spin Mop

RoMop Easy to Go Stainless Steel Deluxe Rolling Spin Mop

This is a great pick for those who are on the taller side.  The RoMop Easy to Go Deluxe Rolling Spin Mop adjusts anywhere from 36 inches to 64 inches.  And, this is the longest adjustable handle on our list.  Furthermore, along with having the longest handle, this spin mop set is one of the largest picks on our list.  So, it’s great for those with a large space to work with.  Just make sure you have the adequate space to store it in.

This spin mop features wheels and a convenient handle to roll from one destination to the next.  This will help prevent unnecessary splashing and the awkwardness of carrying a bucket of water around.  In addition, the bucket comes with a water release valve, so when you’re finished mopping, you can easily discard the dirty mop water.  And, this also prevents unnecessary splashing.

The RoMop Easy to Go Stainless Steel Deluxe Rolling Spin Mop comes with 2 microfiber mop heads, a chenille mop pad and a scrub brush.  The microfiber heads are great for sealed hard-surfaced floors, including wood floors.  And, the chenille mop pad is great for doing the windows, while the scrub brush is for cleaning tile and grout.  Furthermore, these mops heads are all washable and replaceable.

Finally, this is one of the more durable picks on our list.  The handle and the spin bucket are made of stainless steel while the bucket itself is made of high quality plastic.

Pros:

Consumers rave about the quality of this pick for best spin mop.  So, if you’re looking for one of the highest quality mops, this should be a contender.

In addition, the parts of the bucket are easily removable, which makes cleaning the bucket a breeze.

Cons:

There’s not many negatives to this mop.  A couple of consumers felt it was a little difficult to use, but other than that, the majority of consumers are extremely happy.

 

Mopnado Stainless Steel Deluxe Rolling Spin Mop

Mopnado Stainless Steel Deluxe Rolling Spin Mop

Our final pick for best spin mop touts an easier spin than all the rest.  The Mopnado Stainless Steel Deluxe Rolling Spin Mop features plate gears which help to lighten the force needed to spin the mop.  And, in order to spin the mop, just use the handle as a lever to get that thing rolling.

This spin mop is perfect for those with a larger space to mop.  It comes with wheels and a handle to make it easy to get from one room to the next.  Just make sure when all is said and done that you have the space to store it.

The Mopnado Stainless Steel Deluxe Rolling Spin Mop comes with 2 microfiber mop heads which are great for all sealed hard floors including hardwoods, stone, marble, tile and laminate, to name a few.  And, it also comes with a scrub brush to clean grout and tile.

This spin mop features a 180 degree swiveling mop head which will make it easy to reach hard to access areas.  Furthermore, the handle is adjustable up to 56 inches so you can mop out of reach places such as windows.  However, if you’re on the taller side, this may not be enough length for you.  So, you may want to check the RoMop above.

Another notable feature of the Mopnado is it has a built-in soap dispenser.  This soap dispenser is removable and refillable.

Finally, if you’re looking for quality, this is another one of our picks that is built to last.  The mop handle and the spin basket are made with rust-resistant stainless steel, while the rest is made of high quality plastic.

Pros:

The built-in soap dispenser is a great feature and is large enough to last for a few mop sessions.  This all depends on the amount of space you have to mop, though.

In addition, this pick for best spin mop set is made with quality and is built to last.

Cons:

There is no drainage system with the Mopnado Deluxe Rolling Spin Mop.  So, if this is a requirement, we suggest checking out the RoMop above.

Best Weighted Blankets for Adults

6 Best Weighted Blankets for Adults

Weighted blankets just hit the mainstream and its about time.  These blankets have been used for years to help calm the nerves of children with autism and other sensory disorders.  Now, it has been discovered that weighted blankets can help relieve the anxiety that causes restlessness.  And, according to Medical News Today, weighted blankets induce the release of melatonin, the hormone that helps promote sleep and helps to regulate the sleep cycle.  So, with all of this newly discovered information and with our own troubles of falling asleep, we set out to find the best weighted blankets for adults on the market.

And through our search, we found a vert important factor to consider when choosing the right weighted blanket.  Weighted blankets are not a one-weight-fits-all scenario.  Weighted blankets come in an array of different weights, so choosing the correct weight, where it’s not too heavy and not too light, is the first step in order to choosing the best weighted blanket for you.

So, the first question you should ask yourself is, what weight to get for a weighted blanket?

According to the Friendship Circle, a weighted blanket should be about 10% of your body weight.  So, if you weigh 150 pounds, you should be looking for a 15 pound blanket.  If you’re 200 hundred pounds, a 20 pound blanket is what you should be looking for.

Best Weighted Blankets for Adults

What if there isn’t a blanket available that is 10% of your weight?  This will be a personal decision whether you would like to round up or down.  Usually people tend to round upwards.  But, again, this is all up to you.

So, the next step is to determine how big you want your blanket.  And, this is a decision which typically lies on your sleeping arrangements.  If you have a partner who has no trouble sawing Zzz’s, you may consider a blanket that measures half the bed size.  If you’re lucky enough to have the whole bed to yourself, you may consider decorating the entire bed with a weighted blanket.

Which leads us to the final decisions to make, which is style and material.  Our final picks for best weighted blankets for adults are all made with quality material and come in some gorgeous shades.  Furthermore, we made sure that each one of our picks wouldn’t stand out like a weighted blanket, but more like a blanket that was chosen from someone with a good eye for style, which ultimately will be you.

 

Best Weighted Blankets for Adults

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Quility Premium Weighted Blanket
Quility
Premium Weighted Blanket
Cotton
Poly-Filled
Removable Duvet
Non-Toxic
Hypoallergenic
36" x 48" = 5 lbs
41" x 60" = 10 lbs
48" x 72" = 12 lbs
48" x 78" = 15 - 25 lbs
60" x 80" = 15 - 25 lbs
YnM Cooling Weighted Blanket
YnM
Cooling Weighted Blanket
Bamboo Viscose
Poly-Filled
Glass Beads
Cooling
Color Options
48" x 72" = 15 lbs
60" x 80" = 15 - 20 lbs
Luna Weighted Blanket
Luna
Weighted Blanket
Organic Cotton
Poly-Filled
Non-Toxic
Cooling
60" x 80" = 20 lbs
Platinum Health Premium Weighted Blanket
Platinum Health
Premium Weighted Blanket
Minky
Poly-Filled
Glass Beads
Textured
Duvet
Color Options
60" x 80" = 12 lbs
YnM Weighted Blanket
YnM
Weighted Blanket
Cotton
Glass Beads
Duvet
Color Options
48" x 72" = 15 lbs
Kpblis Premium Weighted Blanket
Kpblis
Premium Weighted Blanket
Cotton
Poly-Filled
Non-Toxic
Hypoallergenic
Duvet Options
Color Options
36" x 48" = 5 lbs
40" x 60" = 10 lbs
48" x 72" = 12 - 15 lbs
60" x 80" = 17 - 22 lbs

 

Best Weighted Blankets for Adults

Quility Premium Weighted Blanket

Quility Premium Weighted Blanket

This blanket sits at the top of our list for best weighted blankets for adults for a variety of reasons.  The Qulity Premium Weighted Blanket checks off all of our requirements with some pretty spectacular bonuses.

One of the biggest features of this weighted blanket is it is built for year round use.  The Quility Premium Weighted Blanket has a removable fleece duvet cover which can be removed for the scorching summer months to keep you cool.  Once the chill of the fall nights roll in, simply slide the fleece duvet back on and secure with the 10 buttons that are strategically placed to deliver a traditional duvet look.

The other benefit to this duvet is it will help to keep the weighted portion of the blanket clean for the majority of the year.  And, when it’s time to clean, there’s nothing like throwing the duvet in the wash as opposed to the hassle of dry cleaning – not to mention the cost that comes with that.

The Quility Premium Weighted Blanket is constructed of 100% cotton and filled with non-toxic, hypoallergenic plastic pellets.  And, to keep these pellets in place, this weighted blanket relies on small, stitched squares to help the blanket keep its shape.

Finally, this blanket comes in a variety of weights and your choice of a cotton-feel or a minky feel.

Pros:

The removable fleece duvet is a huge plus.  And, this duvet even has the traditional ties where you can secure the corners of the blanket so it doesn’t get twisted around.

Furthermore, this pick for best weighted blanket is non-toxic and hypoallergenic for an even better rest.

Cons:

Like we mentioned, this blanket has a duvet which can be taken off during the summer months.  However, it doesn’t come with a summertime duvet to protect the blanket.  You may want to consider keeping the duvet on year round or purchasing a separate summer-appropriate duvet.

YnM Cooling Weighted Blanket

YnM Cooling Weighted Blanket

We are in love with the material of the YnM Cooling Weighted Blanket.  This weighted blanket is made of 300 thread count bamboo viscose.  And, according to Cariloha Bamboo, bamboo is a much better choice than cotton as it is stronger and softer.  Not to mention, bamboo is a self-replenishing crop and the benefits to the environment by consuming bamboo are enormous.

The YnM Cooling Weighted blanket is filled with polyfill and glass beads.  These beads are placed in small, stitched squares to keep the fill in place and the blanket in tip-top shape.

This pick for best weighted blankets for adults is great for those who get hot and tend to perspire during the night.  And this is because this blanket is made with SMART fabric and moisture wicking.  This is a breathable fabric that will help to circulate the air and control perspiration.

The YnM Cooling Weighted Blanket comes in your choice of colors:  Dark Grey or Sea Grass.  And, YnM also has a travel blanket up for grabs.  This travel weighted blanket is 10 lbs and comes with a convenient carrying case.

Finally, this weighted blanket is machine washable.  However, because weighted blankets are rather heavy on a wash machine, it is recommended you spot clean or purchase a separate duvet.

Pros:

Keeping things cool is another tactic for a good night’s rest.  So, because this weighted blanket uses SMART fabric and moisture wicking, this blanket will help keep your temperature regulated all night long.

Cons:

It doesn’t come with a duvet, so to keep things clean, you may have to purchase one separately.

And, according to some consumers, this blanket runs on the small side.  So, be sure to size up.

Luna Weighted Blanket

Luna Weighted Blanket

This pick for best weighted blankets for adults is made of 100% organic cotton.  And, this is a very breathable fabric, so if you’re prone to overheating and sweating, this is a weighted blanket to consider.

The Luna Weighted Blanket is filled with high-density plastic poly pellets which are odorless and non-toxic.  And, these are food grade pellets to ensure quality.  Furthermore, this fill comes enclosed in small, stitched squares to help ensure the blanket keeps its shape.

And, thankfully, this weighted blanket is machine washable and can be tumble-dried on low.  However, this all depends on if your wash machine and dryer can handle the weight.

Pros:

First and foremost, this blanket is made with absolute quality.

In addition, we love this weighted blanket for its organic properties.  Furthermore, the fabric is breathable which will help to relieve perspiration throughout the night.

Cons:

This blanket doesn’t come with a duvet cover.  Therefore, you may have to purchase one separately.  If you decide to go without a cover, this weighted blanket is machine washable.  But, like we stated before, this depends if your machine can handle the weight.

Platinum Health Premium Weighted Blanket

Platinum Health Premium Weighted Blanket

If you’re looking for a plush blanket with a luxurious feel, this is one to consider.  The Platinum Health Premium Weighted Blanket features a minky fabric cover.    And, as described by fabric.com, minky resembles the feel of real mink.  It has a short pile and the softness feels like cashmere.

In addition to the mink-like feel, this weighted blanket has a SensaDot™ texture pattern.  This pattern is intended to satisfy those who like to fidget.

Furthermore, this fabric cover is removable for easy cleaning.  Simply machine wash and dry on low heat.

This blanket is intended as a one-weight-fits-all blanket.  Platinum Health claims that most consumers prefer 12 lbs of weight.  So, with their one-weight-fits-all philosophy, they only offer a 12 lb blanket.  However, this is just the beginning.  With this blanket, if you want more weight, simply fold the blanket in half to double the weight.  If you want less weight, use half the blanket and so on.  And, the good news is, this blanket is plenty large in size to accomplish all of this.

Finally, this blanket comes in your choice of color combinations.  Choose from Blue/Green, Purple/Gray, Pink/Gray, Coffee/Cream, Gray/Gray, Mint/Gray or Light Blue/Gray.

Pros:

This one-weight-fits-all philosophy is perfect for those who intend on sharing a blanket.  And, this blanket can accommodate an adult just as easy as a child.

In addition, this is a great blanket for those who get a little chilly at night as this blanket keeps you toasty.  In a good way, of course.

Cons:

Some consumers have had issues with the inner ties securing the blanket.  And, consequently, the blanket gets twisted and turned inside the cover.

Furthermore, this blanket can get pretty toasty.  So, if you’re someone that gets hot during the night, you may want to check out some of our cooling options.

YnM Weighted Blanket

YnM Weighted Blanket

This pick for best weighted blankets for adults is another one from the highly regarded brand YnM.  

This YnM Weighted Blanket is made of 100% cotton with glass bead filling.  These glass beads are hypoallergenic, non-toxic and odorless.  And the benefits to choosing glass beads over plastic beads is glass beads are quieter.  So, if you’re tossing around, these glass beads won’t be keeping your mind churning.

The YnM Weighted Blanket comes equipped with a washable duvet cover.  And, not only is the duvet cover washable, but the blanket as well.  Of course, that is if your washing machine can handle the extra weight.

Finally, the YnM Weighted Blanket comes in your choice of textures, colors and patterns.  Choose from Cotton Blue, Cube and Pure Grey Flannel, Lattice Scroll Flannel and Flamingos.

Pros:

This weighted blanket comes in your choice of textures.  So, you can choose from a softer feel or a more cotton-like feel.  And, this is a win-win for those who get too hot and a win-win for those who get too cold.

In addition, the YnM Weighted Blanket has a removable duvet cover which is a necessity to keep the blanket preserved.

Cons:

Some consumers have complained about the quality of the stitching.  However, it is important to note that most consumers are very satisfied.

Kpblis Premium Weighted Blanket

Kpblis Premium Weighted Blanket

Our final pick for best weighted blankets for adults is our favorite in terms of style.  The Kpblis Premium Weighted Blanket comes in soothing, zen-like colors that are more representative of a home decor magazine.  So, if style is high on your list, without a doubt, this is your blanket.

The Kpblis Premium Weighted Blanket is made of 100% cotton and filled with non-toxic, hypoallergenic poly pellets.  These pellets are sewn into small squares to help ensure the weight is evenly distributed and the blanket keeps its shape.

And, although this blanket doesn’t come with a duvet cover, this blanket offers loops which will help secure the blanket inside of a duvet.  This attests to the quality and the thoughtful details Kpblis used while in the design process.

Furthermore, this company makes its own duvet covers you can purchase separately.  So, if you love the color choices and the style, this is a huge plus.

Finally, speaking of colors, you have your choice of Dark Navy, Grey or Dark Grey.

Pros:

This pick for best weighted blankets for adults gets an A++ for style and color.  In addition, because we love their color choices so much, the fact they make their own duvets, is a huge bonus.

Furthermore, the attention to detail with this weighted blanket is a huge selling point.

Cons:

Some consumers felt the blanket they received was on the small size, therefore, you may want to size up.  Of course, this is if the weight allows.

In addition, if you’re someone who gets hot at night, you may want to check out some of our cooling options.  This blanket tends to get hot and is not recommended for the summer months.

 

Best Small Microwave

Best Small Microwave – Top 6 Countertop Picks

If you’re looking for the best small microwave to fit a particularly small space, we’ve got you covered.  We searched through tons of microwaves and found the most highly regarded and top reviewed small countertop microwaves on the market.

So, what did we look for when we searched for the best small microwave?  First, we took into account small spaces, nooks and crannies.  And not every microwave is a one size fits all ordeal.  Therefore, we wanted a variety of sizes, from extra small to small, that would cater to nearly every consumer out there.

Best Small Microwave

Next, we searched for quality.  And along with quality comes durability.  Our final picks had to withstand the constant abuse we put microwaves through and live through the ordeal to tell about it.  Well, the live through part we made sure of.  A talking small microwave is something we have yet to see in the future.

Then, we wanted bonus options.  Because small microwaves are more compact, they can only have so many options.  So, while not all of our final picks for best small microwave have the same options, they all have something that will cater to our microwave needs.  Whether it’s a turntable, auto defrost, a 30 second option, popcorn button or 10 power levels, these tiny microwaves deliver some much-desired bonuses.

So, to reiterate, our requirements for the best small microwave include:

  • A variety of sizes from extra small to small.
  • Quality and durability.  This includes scouring user reviews to ensure longevity.
  • Bonus options.

 

Best Small Microwave

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Whirlpool Countertop Microwave
Whirlpool
Countertop Microwave
Stainless Steel
Clock
Interior Light
LED Display
Turntable
30 Second Option
Popcorn Button
750 Watts
0.5 Cubic Feet
13.75" x 14.13" x 15.38"
Sharp R-21LCF Medium-Duty Commercial Microwave
Sharp
R-21LCF Medium-Duty Commercial Microwave
Stainless Steel
Dial Timer
Interior Light
1,000 Watts
1.0 Cubic Feet
20.5" x 16" x 12.1"
Daewoo KOR-7LREW Retro Microwave Oven
Daewoo
KOR-7LREW Retro Microwave Oven
4 Automatic Levels
5 Power Levels
2-Way Defrost
Interior Light
LED Display
Zero Standby
Child Safety Lock
700 Watts
0.7 Cubic Feet
12.7" x 17.6" x 10.6"
Panasonic NE-1025F 1000W Commercial Microwave Oven
Panasonic
NE-1025F 1000W Commercial Microwave Oven
Stainless Steel
Dial Timer
Interior Light
1,000 Watts
0.8 Cubic Feet
16.6" x 20.1" x 12"
Sharp ZSMC0912BS 900W Countertop Microwave Oven
Sharp
ZSMC0912BS 900W Countertop Microwave Oven
Stainless Steel
Clock
Interior Light
LED Display
Turntable
30 Second Option
Popcorn Button
Beverage Button
Auto Defrost
900 Watts
0.9 Cubic Feet
12.4" x 8.7" x 13.7"
Westinghouse 600 Watt Counter Top Rotary Microwave Oven
Westinghouse
600 Watt Counter Top Rotary Microwave Oven
Stainless Steel
Dial Timer
Dial Settings
Defrost
Interior Light
Color Options
600 Watts
0.6 Cubic Feet
17.75" x 12.5" x 10.25"

 

Best Small Microwave

 

Whirlpool Countertop Microwave

Whirlpool Countertop Microwave

Our first pick on our list is the smallest at 0.5 cubic feet.  However, the Whirlpool Countertop Microwave is extremely roomy for its size as it will accommodate a dinner plate up to 11 inches in diameter.  Furthermore, because of the height of this microwave, you will have no problems inserting taller mugs or tumblers.

This pick for best small microwave offers a whopping ten power levels, including defrost.  It also features 750 Watts of power, which is extraordinary for a microwave at this size.  The preferred wattage for a microwave is at 1,000 watts.  However, according to Goodhousekeeping, microwaves with less than 700 watts are slower and may not cook evenly.  And, the higher the wattage the better.  So, this microwave hits above the 700 watt range and cooks accordingly.

Other features of this countertop microwave include 10 levels of cooking power which includes defrost, a rotating turntable to assist in cooking evenly, tap touch controls for easy handling and easy cleaning, a 30 second button and a one-touch popcorn button.

The Whirlpool Countertop Microwave offers a blue LED display and a lighted interior so you can keep an eye on your prize while its cooking.

Finally, once your food is ready, this countertop microwave will alert you with 3 consecutive beeps.  Thereafter, it will remind you every 30 seconds.

Pros:

This pick for best small microwave gets an A++ for style.  It has a subtle retro design that can nonchalantly fit with any decor.

Furthermore, for such a small microwave, this unit is stacked.  It has nearly all the wants and needs of a larger microwave.

Cons:

It seems some consumers received a defective product.  While the majority of consumers are happy, just beware you may be testing your luck with this one.

Sharp R-21LCF Medium-Duty Commercial Microwave

Sharp R-21LCF Medium-Duty Commercial Microwave

At 1.0 cubic feet, this countertop microwave is considered a standard size for small microwaves.  The Sharp R-21LCF Medium-Duty Commercial Microwave can accommodate a 13.5 inch dinner plate.  Furthermore, it has plenty of clearance from top to bottom to fit taller-sized items.

The Sharp R-21LCF Medium-Duty Commercial Microwave operates on 1,000 watts.  And like we mentioned earlier, the higher the wattage, the quicker and more evenly the food cooks.  So, 1,000 watts is a great amount of power to get the job done.  Furthermore, with this microwave, it cooks by way of a magnetron.  Magnetrons emit radio waves, so there’s no need for a rotating turntable to ensure even cooking.

This countertop microwave comes with a dial timer which can be set from 10 seconds to 6 minutes.  If you wish to cook longer, just reset the timer once the 6 minutes is up.  To cancel the cooking at any time, simply open the door or turn the dial back to zero.

The Sharp R-21LCF Commercial Microwave features a dim interior light so you can keep an eye on your food while its cooking.  In addition, the dial has an orange light which will flash as the timer counts down.  Once the cooking time is up, the Sharp Commercial Microwave will alert you with a single ring.

Pros:

With this countertop microwave, you can adjust the cook time while you’re cooking, which with a lot of microwaves, you have to go through the whole cancellation process in order to achieve this.

Another feature we love about this microwave is it is easy to clean.  And, this is due to the microwave using a magnetron heating mechanism instead of a rotating turntable.

Lastly, because this is a commercial microwave, it is built to last.

Cons:

This pick for best small microwave is as simple as you can get.  It doesn’t have all of the bells and whistles, and in all actuality, it is pretty bare bones.  There is no defrost and no preset settings.  While this might be a turnoff for a lot of people, simple is sometimes better.

Daewoo KOR-7LREW Retro Microwave Oven

Daewoo KOR-7LREW Retro Microwave Oven

If you’re on a budget, this little machine will serve you well.  The Daewoo KOR-7LREW Retro Microwave Oven offers a lot of bang for a little buck.  At under $100, this pick for best small microwave oven offers 4 automatic cooking levels, 5 power levels and 2-way defrost.

However, because this is a budget pick, you will be using 700 watts of power.  This means there will be longer cook times and chances are, uneven cooking.  The good news is, this countertop microwave comes with a rotating turntable which will assist with cooking your food more evenly and thoroughly.

The Daewoo KOR-7LREW Retro Microwave Oven is eco-friendly as it features a zero standby function.  The zero standby function will reduce your power consumption, thus reducing your carbon footprint.

This pick for best small microwave is on the smaller side of the scale with 0.7 cubic feet of interior space.  This will accommodate up to a 10.5 inch dinner plate.

Finally, other notable features of this microwave are the child safety lock, interior light, LED display and an alert to let you know dinner is ready.

Pros:

We are really digging this microwave for its extra bonus features and its style.  It is a great little machine for those who live in tiny spaces like apartments and dorms.

Furthermore, the zero standby function is a great addition.  It’s nice to know that power is reduced while not in use.  This will not only save on your electric bill, it will also extend the life of the microwave – not to mention take a little toll off the environment.

Cons:

This microwave has only 700 watts of power.  However, at this price range, this is the wattage range you’re going to get.  The good news is, this microwave is outfitted with a rotating turntable to offset the lower watts.

Panasonic NE-1025F 1000W Commercial Microwave Oven

Panasonic NE-1025F 1000W Commercial Microwave Oven

This is another small commercial microwave oven that is worthy of a spot on this list.  However, this microwave oven is even smaller at 0.8 cubic feet.  

But, don’t let the size fool you.  This commercial microwave will fit half-size pans at 6 inches tall with the cover on.  And, to get a better grasp on how roomy this microwave is, a half-size pan measures 12 inches by 10 inches.

The Panasonic NE-1025F Commercial Microwave Oven runs on 1,000 watts of power.  And with this amount of watts, you will see quicker cooking times and more thorough cooking.  Also, this microwave does not use a turntable.  Instead it features an antenna which rotates, ensuring even cooking.

This countertop microwave works by turning the dial anywhere from 10 seconds to 6 minutes.  To adjust the time while you’re cooking, simply turn the knob.  And, if you want to cancel the cooking prematurely, just open the door or turn the dial back to zero.

Finally, the Panasonic NE-1025F Commercial Microwave Oven features a Grab & Go door handle.  This means you can just open the door without messing with any levers or buttons.  This microwave also features an interior light, a lighted dial so you can easily keep track of time and 5 beeps to alert you when your food is ready.

Pros:

For the size of this microwave, it has a lot of power and is very roomy.  And because it is a commercial microwave, it is durably built to last.

Furthermore, since this microwave doesn’t come equipped with a turntable, it is very easy to clean.

Cons:

If you’re looking for extra features, you may want to keep looking at some of the other microwaves on our list.  This microwave is as simple as you can get, no defrost, no turntable, no presets and no clock.

Sharp ZSMC0912BS 900W Countertop Microwave Oven

Sharp ZSMC0912BS 900W Countertop Microwave Oven

This is perhaps our favorite budget pick on our list.  Not style-wise but functionality-wise.  The Sharp ZSMC0912BS 900W Countertop Microwave Oven offers a variety of automatic functions.  This includes auto defrost, auto beverage, auto popcorn and auto reheat buttons.  This countertop microwave also features a convenient 30 second button and one touch buttons to cook up to 6 minutes.

The Sharp Countertop Microwave Oven offers 900 watts of power, so you’re still in the range where you will see quick cook times and even heating.  Furthermore, this countertop microwave oven comes with a carousel turntable to ensure even and thorough cooking.

And, there’s no need to worry about room.  This microwave oven has 0.9 cubic feet of interior space which is enough to accommodate a full-size dinner plate or roughly 11 inches.

Finally, in addition to all of the above, the Sharp Countertop Microwave Oven comes with an interior light and a blue LED display.  And, once your food has finished cooking, you will be alerted by 5 consecutive beeps.

Pros:

It’s not hard to see the positives with this microwave.  It has everything you would expect with a standard-sized microwave.  So, if you’re looking to get your money’s worth, this is, hands down, the right choice to make.

Cons:

We are not in love with the design.  It’s rather basic and microwave-looking.

Furthermore, it seems some consumers have received duds.  While this happens occasionally with appliances, its something to be a little wary about.  However, its important to note that most consumers are happy with this product.

Westinghouse 600 Watt Counter Top Rotary Microwave Oven

Westinghouse 600 Watt Counter Top Rotary Microwave Oven

Our final pick for best small microwave is another one for those on a budget.  And, this is one that is more classic and simple in design.  The Westinghouse 600 Watt Countertop Rotary Microwave Oven features a rotary dial for easy operation.

And, this is one of the smaller microwaves on our list.  So, if you’re looking for the smallest microwave you possibly can, this is one of your contenders.  This microwave features 0.6 cubic feet of interior space with a 9.5 inch turntable.  Therefore, you’re looking at a microwave that accommodates a 10 inch dinner plate.

The Westinghouse Counter Top Rotary Microwave Oven works by simply turning the rotary dials.  The top rotary dial features defrost, medium low, medium, medium high and high power levels.  Once you have your power level set, you can rotate the bottom dial for your desired time, up to 30 minutes.  When the time is up, you will be alerted by an unmistakable ding.

This countertop microwave offers 600 watts of power.  While this isn’t ideal, it is enough power to heat food, albeit at a slower rate.  However, it does come with a rotating turntable to help ensure even and thorough heating.

Finally, with this microwave, you have your choice of colors:  Black or White.

Pros:

If you’re looking to outfit a rather small space without any frills or any gimmicks, this is a great option.

Cons:

We are weary of the low amount of wattage offered by this microwave.  So, if you’re looking for occasional cooking, such as in a dorm or an RV, this may suit you just fine.

Best Area Rugs for Kitchen

8 Best Area Rugs for Kitchen

When searching for the best area rugs for kitchen, there’s not a lot of selection in that particular category.  Therefore, we had to expand our search to other rug categories in order to deliver a selection of the best area rugs for the kitchen that would cater to our high-traffic needs.

And, there were a few requirements we had in mind when choosing these rugs.  First, the kitchen is a bustling place and an area rug in this particular place should be able to handle all the back and forth that goes on throughout the day.  Therefore, this requirement enabled us to set our sights on quality and durability.

Next we searched for the best area rugs for kitchen that would be able to handle the flying crumbs and random spills that are just apart of kitchen life.  So, we made sure our selection of rugs were easy to clean and/or stain resistant.  Furthermore, with some of our picks, we were also able to find mildew-resistant rugs.  And this is crucial for those spills that go unnoticed.

Best Area Rugs for Kitchen

The third requirement we determined to be a necessity is something to keep the rug in place.  The last thing you want to worry about when transporting a pot full of hot water is sliding across the kitchen.  So, each one of our picks is either made of materials that are resistant to slipping, whether it is due to non-slip backing or a particular material the rug is made out of.

And, slipping is not the only thing there is to worry about.  With a lesser quality of rug, we often find the corners to turn upwards which is a trip hazard.  Consequently, the rugs you see on our list will all lay flat or they will have a seemless edge.  

Lastly, and certainly not least, our selection of best area rugs for kitchen need to look good.  Therefore, we chose an array of timeless options that will be sure to go with just about every decor.  And, don’t forget, most of these rugs come in a multitude of colors.  So, if you’re not jiving with the color but love the pattern and texture, you may want to click for further options.

 

Best Area Rugs for Kitchen

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Vanill Kitchen Vinyl Mat Linoleum Rug
Vanill
Kitchen Vinyl Mat Linoleum Rug
PVC
Non-Toxic
Allergin Free
Slip-Resistant
Color Options
35.4" x 23.6"
47.2" x 27.5" - 70.8"
59" x 80.7" - 118"
63" x 23.6" - 31.5"
70.8" x 23.6"
94.5" x 23.6"
Ottomanson Jardin Collection Natural Indoor/Outdoor Jute Rug
Ottomanson
Jardin Collection Natural Indoor/Outdoor Jute Rug
Polypropylene
Low Pile
Shed-Resistant
Stain-Resistant
Mildew-Resistant
Slip-Resistant
Color Options
2'7" x 7'
5'3" x 7'3"
Kangaroo Brands The Original 3/4" Kangaroo Anti-Fatique Comfort Kitchen Mat
Kangaroo Brands
The Original 3/4" Kangaroo Anti-Fatique Comfort Kitchen Mat
Foam
Anti-Fatigue
Non-Toxic
Phthalate-Free
Slip-Resistant
Waterproof
Color Options
32" x 20"
39" x 20"
70" x 24"
Diagona Designs Contemporary Traditional Moroccan Trellis Area Rug
Diagona Designs
Contemporary Traditional Moroccan Trellis Area Rug
Polypropylene
Low Pile
Stain-Resistant
Mildew-Resistant
Slip-Resistant
Fade-Resistant
Color Options
2'7" x 9'10"
5'3" x 7'3"
63" x 87"
6'7" x 9'3"
7'10" x 9'10"
nuLOOM Natural Hand Woven Rigo Jute Rug
nuLOOM
Natural Hand Woven Rigo Jute Rug
Jute
Anti-Static
UV Protected
Slip Resistant
Color Options
2'3" x 4'
2'6" x 8'
4' Round
5' x 8'
6' Round
8' Round
8' x 10'
9' x 12'
Ottomanson Ottohome Collection Persian Heriz Oriental Non-Skid Area Rug
Ottomanson
Ottohome Collection Persian Heriz Oriental Non-Skid Area Rug
Polypropylene
Low Pile
Shed-Resistant
Stain-Resistant
Mildew-Resistant
Slip-Resistant
UV Protected
Color Options
1'10" x 7'
2' x 5'
3'3" x 5'
5' x 6'6"
8'2" x 9'10"
20" x 59"
Kapaqua Rubber Backed Moroccan Trellis Non-Slip Area Rug
Kapaqua
Rubber Backed Moroccan Trellis Non-Slip Area Rug
Polypropylene
Low Pile
Shed-Resistant
Stain-Resistant
Mildew-Resistant
Slip-Resistant
UV Protected
Color Options
2' x 4' - 20'
3' x 5' - 10'
5' x 7'
7' x 10'
8' x 11'
Fab Habitat Reversible Indoor/Outdoor Weather Restistant Floor Mat
Fab Habitat
Reversible Indoor/Outdoor Weather Restistant Floor Mat
Recycled Plastic
Reversible
Mildew-Resistant
UV Protected
3' x 5'
4' x 6'
5' x 8'
6' x 9'

 

Best Area Rugs for Kitchen

Vanill Kitchen Vinyl Mat Linoleum Rug

Vanill Kitchen Vinyl Mat Linoleum Rug

The first pick on our list for best area rugs for kitchen is a great solution for families or a household that happily creates a mess.

The Vanill Kitchen Vinyl Rug is made of high quality PVC, which resists environmental deterioration, is non-toxic and is resistant to dust and allergens.

Furthermore, you will get your use of this rug as PVC is both durable and flexible.    

The Vanill Kitchen Vinyl Mat Linoleum Rug lays completely flat on the floor, once you’ve prepped it for display.  To prep the mat, simply lay it out in the sun so the material softens.  Once it softens, spread it flat and you have the perfect surface to cook on.

The other aspect of this rug that stands out to us is it is comfortable to walk on.  Because it is made of flexible PVC, you will enjoy a slight cloud-like feeling with every step.  In addition, the PVC will allow the rug to naturally stay where its intended to stay.  So, no slipping or sliding around. 

The Vanill Kitchen Rug is easy to clean, simply wipe with a damp cloth.  However, it is recommended you refrain from using harsh cleaners.

Finally, this kitchen rug comes in all sorts of colors and gorgeous designs.  Because there are too many to list, we suggest you take a browse through them here.

Pros:

Vanill makes gorgeous designs for their rugs.  And, their color palettes are perfect for the kitchen.

In addition, the material is perfectly suited for high-traffic kitchens as it is both durable and non-toxic.

Cons:

If you’re looking for the actual texture of a rug, this rug may not be your first choice.  However, the Vanill Kitchen Rugs are soft and comfortable to walk on and the material is perhaps the most logical choice for a kitchen.

 

Ottomanson Jardin Collection Natural Indoor/Outdoor Jute Rug

Ottomanson Jardin Collection Natural Indoor/Outdoor Jute Rug

This pick for best area rugs for kitchen is made to withstand the outdoors.  So, what will withstand the outdoors will surely withstand the kitchen.

The Ottomanson Jardin Collection Natural Indoor/Outdoor Jute Rug is made in Turkey, of polypropylene construction, in a woven jute fashion.

And while jute is typically woven from natural fibers, this rug is woven with polypropylene.  The benefits to this, beyond durability, is it won’t absorb moisture as a typical jute rug would.  In fact, it won’t absorb it at all.  And this makes it a perfect rug for those random spills that happen in the kitchen. 

Another aspect which sets this rug apart from the naturally woven jute rug is this rug won’t shed.  So, you won’t be cleaning up fibers along with the crumbs.

The Ottomanson Jardin Collection Jute Rug has a low pile weight which lays flat on the floor.  This low pile weight will allow for a near seemless transition from the floor to the carpet.  And, like we stated before, this will help prevent tripping your way across the kitchen.

This area rug for the kitchen is easy to care for.  Simply spot clean and vacuum regularly.  And, it comes in your choice of 4 different colors:  Brown, Cream, Dark Brown or Mocha.

Pros:

The Ottomanson Jute Rug has a natural feel with all of the durability and very few drawbacks.  Most notably, its resistance to shedding and soiling.

Furthermore, this rug is stain-resistant and mildew-resistant.

Cons:

Because this pick for best area rugs for kitchen does not have slip-resistant backing, you may find that it will slip on wood or marble floors.  For an easy fix, check out these non-slip pads you can purchase separately.

 

Kangaroo Brands The Original 3/4" Kangaroo Anti-Fatique Comfort Kitchen Mat

Kangaroo Brands The Original 3/4″ Kangaroo Anti-Fatigue Comfort Kitchen Mat

If you’re looking for comfort, you have found your “rug.”  However, this pick is more appropriately called a mat.  And this mat is not only comfortable but it is rehabilitating.  It will help to improve posture, condition muscles and sooth aches and pains.

Sounds too good to be true, right?  It does, however, when we first stepped on this mat, we didn’t want to leave.  This mat is absolute heaven.

The Original Kangaroo Anti-Fatigue Comfort Kitchen Mat is made of 3/4 inch top grade foam which is non-toxic and phthalate-free.  This foam helps to eliminate pressure on the joints, back, feet and extremities, while providing support for long periods of time.  So, if you’re someone who is in the kitchen all day, this mat is a must have and will make the kitchen a more enjoyable place to be.

Furthermore, this mat is heavy-duty.  It is extremely durable and will keep its shape over time.  It is also waterproof and features a slight texture for a slip-resistant surface.  And, the underside of the mat has a grooved surface to keep the mat in place while the sloped edges offer a smooth transition when stepping from the floor onto the mat.

To care for this mat, simply vacuum and wipe clean with a damp cloth.  You can also scrub it and hose it off if need be.

The Original Kangaroo Anti-Fatigue Comfort Kitchen Mat comes in your choice of 9 colors:  Beige, Black, Brown, Gray, Hunter Green, Mocha, Navy, Red or Sand.

Pros:

The comfort of this mat is undeniable.  It is extremely supportive and relieves pressure from your head to your feet.

However, the other notable aspects of this mat is it’s very durable and easy to maintain.

Cons:

To be completely honest, when we first laid eyes on it, we felt it was rather unattractive.  That is until we stepped on it and it quickly grew on us.  The plus side to this mat is it does come in different colors, so depending on how you match the color to your kitchen, it may just be love at first sight.

 

Diagona Designs Contemporary Traditional Moroccan Trellis Area Rug

Diagona Designs Contemporary Traditional Moroccan Trellis Area Rug

This pick for best area rugs for kitchen is made with a durable synthetic pile with a jute-style backing.  And, this jute-style backing is also synthetic.  So, you won’t have to deal with shedding that often comes with natural jute material.

The Diagona Designs Contemporary Traditional Moroccan Trellis Area Rug is made of a 100% polypropylene.  Polypropylene is resistant to moisture, therefore, it is resistant to mildew and stains.  Furthermore, it also resistant to fading.  So, if this rug is in a spot where the sun hits, it is UV protected.

This area rug offers a low pile so it will create a near seemless transition from floor to rug.  And, this will help prevent you from tripping your way across the kitchen.  In addition, because of the jute backing, this rug is slip-resistant.

Lastly, the Diagona Designs Contemporary Traditional Moroccan Trellis Area Rug comes in your choice of 5 color combinations:  Grey/Ivory, Ivory/Navy, Navy/Ivory, Ivory/Purple or Ivory/Grey.

Pros:

This rug comes with a natural worn look, so add that to the polypropylene construction, and this rug works well in high-traffic areas.

Furthermore, it has a subtle Moroccan design which will compliment just about any decor.

Cons:

Because this rug is on the thin side, it tends to wrinkle if placed on carpet.  However, if you intend on using this rug on wood, marble or tile floors, you shouldn’t run into this issue.

Also, this rug is intentionally faded in some areas.  While some people love this particular design aspect, some see it as an eyesore.

 

nuLOOM Natural Hand Woven Rigo Jute Rug

nuLOOM Natural Hand Woven Rigo Jute Rug

If you want to go with a traditional jute rug that is made with natural fibers, this may be the perfect rug for your kitchen.  The nuLOOM Natural Rigo Jute Rug is hand-woven in India with natural jute fiber.

Now, we haven’t touched on what jute really is.  We’ve spoken about the jute weave but jute is a whole different story.  Jute is a natural fiber which is mainly grown in India and Bangladesh.  It is a strong fiber that holds its shape well and offers natural UV protection, as well as, anti-static properties.

Furthermore, jute can be fairly easy to clean.  You can simply run a vacuum over it, brush with a stiff bristle brush or blot with a damp cloth.  These are just some of the ways to care for jute.  But if you need more in-depth detail, you can find it here.

The nuLOOM Natural Hand Woven Rigo Jute Rug is naturally slip-resistant.  However, this particular rug is also trip-resistant.  And this is because it has an oval shape and doesn’t contain any corners that will perk up.  Furthermore, it is low pile, so it will offer an easy transition when stepping from the floor to the rug.

Finally, this rug comes in your choice of colors:  Natural or Beige.

Pros:

This pick for best area rugs for kitchen is as natural as you can get.  And, there’s nothing like bringing the outdoors inside.  In addition, this rug will go with any decor.  And, with the natural color selection, you can’t go wrong.

Furthermore, nuLOOM makes quality rugs at a very decent price.  So, with all this being said, you’re getting a great deal with this rug.

Cons:

Because it is made with natural jute material, this rug is prone to mildew.  However, because it is on the thin side, it would take a lot of spills to create mildew.  Our suggestion, if you do spill something, make sure to dry it out as soon as possible.

And, again, because it is jute, it will shed.  Not a whole lot, but you will most likely be seeing more fibers than crumbs.

 

Ottomanson Ottohome Collection Persian Heriz Oriental Non-Skid Area Rug

Ottomanson Ottohome Collection Persian Heriz Oriental Non-Skid Area Rug

Persian rugs look fantastic in the kitchen so we made sure to include a persian-style rug that will hold up in a high-traffic area.  The Ottomanson Otthome Collection Persian Heriz Oriental Non-Skid Area Rug is stain-resistant, slip-resistant, shed-resistant and fade-resistant.  In addition, this rug will not absorb moisture, making it mildew-resistant.  And, it is also easy to clean.  Simply vacuum and clean with a damp cloth and a mild soap.    

Made of 100% polypropylene, this pick for best area rugs for kitchen is a low pile rug which offers a nearly seemless transition from floor to rug.  And, this helps to eliminate the bulk that can cause you to trip as you bustle your way back and forth from counter to counter.  Furthermore, the underside of this rug has a rubber backing, which will help prevent this rug from sliding around.

The Ottomanson Ottohome Collection Persian Heriz Area Rug comes in a multitude of sizes and your choice of 2 colors, Red Heriz or Sage Green Heriz (pictured above.)

Pros:

This pick for best area rug for kitchen has a timeless look to it.  So, not only will it work with just about any decor, it will never run out of style.

In addition, at this price, you can’t beat the quality and the look.

Cons:

Some consumers complain this rug is rather uncomfortable and on the thin side, with one consumer stating it felt more like astro turf.  However, if you’re using it in a high-traffic area such as the kitchen, this may be ideal.

 

Kapaqua Rubber Backed Moroccan Trellis Non-Slip Area Rug

Kapaqua Rubber Backed Moroccan Trellis Non-Slip Area Rug

We love Moroccan patterns so it is no surprise we have yet another Moroccan-inspired rug on our list.  And, the great thing about this particular design is it can go with classic or modern decor.  You can even mix it in with country-inspired decor.

The Kapaqua Rubber Backed Moroccan Trellis Non-Slip Area Rug is machine woven with a loop pile.  In addition, it is a low pile rug, so your chance of slipping on the edge of the rug is greatly reduced.  And, this rug has a rubber backing, so it is also slip-resistant.

This pick for best area rugs for kitchen is made of 100% polypropylene which is resistant to stains, mildew, bacteria and moisture.  It is also easy to care for.  Simply vacuum and wipe with a damp cloth.  And if needed, you can use a mild detergent.

Finally, this rug comes in numerous sizes and colors.  Your color choices are:  Brown, Grey, Ivory, Light Blue, Neon Green, Orange, Pink, Purple, Red, Teal or Yellow.

Pros:

This rug offers all the necessities for the kitchen.  It’s easy to clean, easy to care for, it is slip-resistant, stain-resistant and mildew-resistant.

Furthermore, this area rug for the kitchen comes in all different sizes and colors.  So, your chances of matching the carpet to your decor and space greatly increase.

Cons:

This rug is rather light.  So, even though it comes with rubber backing, you made need to add a non-slip pad to ensure this rug stays in place.  However, everyone has different type of flooring so what slips for one may not slip for another.

Fab Habitat Reversible Indoor/Outdoor Weather Restistant Floor Mat

Fab Habitat Reversible Indoor/Outdoor Weather Restistant Floor Mat

Our final pick for best area rugs for kitchen is an indoor/outdoor rug.  So, this is going to handle a lot of abuse.  Furthermore, it is reversible.  So, if one side gives, you have the other side to count on.

The Fab Habitat Reversible Indoor/Outdoor Weather Resistant Floor Mat is an eco-friendly rug made of 100% recycled plastic.  This plastic is power loomed in a woven fashion.

And, if you have ever had anything woven of recycled plastic, you will know that it is highly durable and practically lasts forever.  In addition, you’re doing the environment a favor by taking some plastic out of the ocean.

The Fab Habitat Reversible Floor Mat won’t soak up moisture, so it is resistant to mold and mildew.  Furthermore, it is also UV resistant.  Therefore, if the spot you’re looking to place this rug gets any amount of sunlight, you won’t have to worry about fading.

This area rug for the kitchen comes in a multitude of sizes and your choice of colors:  Blue or Teal.

Finally, this rug is easy to care for.  Simply shake off any crumbs or you can even hose it off.

Pros:

Because this rug is made of recycled plastic, it can handle all kinds of abuse.  And, because of this, this rug is great for those with kids and/or pets.

Furthermore, we really respect Fab Habitat’s principles.  They not only make recycled products, but they ensure their products are child-labor free.

Cons:

If this rug obtains a lot of moisture, it can get slippery.  However, if you’re using it indoors, you shouldn’t need to worry about this too much.

best squirrel proof bird feeder

Best Squirrel Proof Bird Feeder

If you’re looking for the best squirrel proof bird feeder, we found the top 5 bird feeders that will keep those pesky critters out and the birds coming back for more.

So, how do these bird feeders keep those squirrels at bay?  For starters, these feeders are made with materials that will keep the squirrels from getting anywhere near the bird seed.  Simply put, these bird feeders are chew-proof.

However, what differs with each of these bird feeders is how they keep the squirrels from getting the bird seed where the birds perch.  For instance, one of our picks comes with a motor which will detect the weight of a squirrel and literally spin the squirrel away.  This may sound cruel, but it’s pretty harmless to the squirrel as they are acclimated to moving surfaces such as tree limbs and branches.  So, they can roll with the punches quite easily.

best squirrel proof bird feeder 

Furthermore, a couple of our picks will detect the weight of the squirrel and this will activate a locking mechanism which will shut off the seed supply.  And, a couple of others have a unique design which just simply does not accommodate squirrels.  But, there’s something else you may want to consider to go along with the squirrel proof bird feeder.

Squirrel Proof Bird Feeder Pole

A squirrel proof bird feeder pole can be an extra deterrent from squirrels and something you may take into consideration to further ensure the bird seed goes to who they were intended for.

Squirrel proof bird feeder poles help to deter squirrels by using a “hanging basket” design for the bird feeders.  Then, there is either a spring or a baffle placed in the middle of the pole to prevent the squirrel from scaling the pole and snatching the seed.

Typically, you can use the squirrel proof bird feeder pole with just a normal bird feeder as opposed to a squirrel proof bird feeder.  And, in this case, you may have luck keeping the squirrels away.  However, most people have the best luck keeping the squirrels away by using a squirrel proof bird feeder pole along with squirrel proof bird feeders.  This is pretty much a sure-fire way to keep the squirrels away for good.

So, now you know how to keep the squirrels away, we have the 5 top picks for best squirrel proof bird feeder.  And, these bird feeders are the leaders in the market.  This means, they are well-designed for aesthetic purposes, they have a high rating for squirrel-repellent and they are functional and durable.

 

Best Squirrel Proof Bird Feeder

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Brome 1057 Squirrel Buster Standard Wild Bird Feeder
Brome
1057 Squirrel Buster Standard Wild Bird Feeder
Metal
Water Proof
Rust-Proof
UV Stabilized
1.3 lb Seed Capacity
Seed Ventilation System
5" x 5" x 21"
Arundale The Sky Cafe
Arundale
The Sky Cafe
Recycled Plexiglass
Weather Resistant
1.5 Gallon Seed Capacity
17" x 17" x 17"
Droll Yankees Yankee Flipper Squirrel Proof Bird Feeder
Droll Yankees
Yankee Flipper Squirrel Proof Bird Feeder
Polycarbonate
Metal
UV Stabilized
5 lb Seed Capacity
8.5" x 8.5" x 28.5"
Heritage Farms Woodlink Absolute Squirrel Resistant Bird Feeder Model 7533
The Nuttery
NT066 Classic Peanut Sunflower Seed Feeder
Metal
Weather Resistant
1.73 lb Seed Capacity
14.2" x 7.9" x 7.9"
Heritage Farms Woodlink Absolute Squirrel Resistant Bird Feeder Model 7533
Heritage Farms
Woodlink Absolute Squirrel Resistant Bird Feeder Model 7533
Steel
Weather Resistant
15 lb Seed Capacity
Pole
Hangar
13.5" x 16" x 11.2"

 

Best Squirrel Proof Bird Feeder

 

Brome 1057 Squirrel Buster Standard Wild Bird Feeder

Brome 1057 Squirrel Buster Standard Wild Bird Feeder

Our first pick for best squirrel proof bird feeder is one of the most popular anti squirrel proof bird feeders on the market.  So much so, that this bird feeder gets hundreds, if not thousands, of search engine searches a month.

The Brome 1057 Squirrel Buster Standard Wild Bird Feeder deters squirrels by detecting their weight and closing the seed hatches accordingly.  And, it not only deters squirrels, but larger birds as well.

In addition to this deterrent, this squirrel proof bird feeder is made of chew proof metals.  So, squirrels can’t chew or claw their way to the seed.  This chew proof material is also waterproof, rust-proof and UV stabilized, which will extend the look and the life of the feeder.

The Brom Squirrel Buster features a seed ventilation system at the top of the feeder which releases the humidity and hot air through the vents and replaces it with fresh air.  This will help to keep the seed fresh and more attractive to the birds.

And, with the Squirrel Buster, it is recommended you leave at least 18 inches of room around the feeder in order to force the squirrel to mount the feeder which triggers the closing mechanism.  If you don’t leave this amount of room, the squirrel may find a way to bypass the feeder and mount another part of the bird feeder to gain access to the seed.  And, this is where the squirrel proof bird feeder pole may come in handy.  This pole will enable you to create the 18 inches you need without much forethought.

The other option you have is going with the Brome Squirrel Buster Plus Bird Feed and Accessory Kit.  This comes with the Squirrel Buster Bird Feeder, a pole, a perch ring and a weather guard.

Lastly, the Brom Squirrel Buster measures 5 inches in diameter and 21.5 inches tall.

Pros:

This is a very well designed bird feeder and is made with quality materials.

Furthermore, many consumers raved about how well it deterred the squirrels, with one consumer stating it even deterred a bear!

Cons:

The perches are rather small, comfortably accommodating smaller birds.  However, larger birds have a difficult time perching.  So, if you’re looking to attract larger birds, you may want to go with another option.

Additionally, the seed ports are on the small side.  So, if you’re looking to fill this feeder with larger food items such as fruit or nuts, you may be looking at clearing out the seed ports often.

Arundale The Sky Cafe

Arundale The Sky Cafe

This next pick for best squirrel proof bird feeder has a picture-perfect, postcard-like design.

The Arundale Sky Cafe Bird Feeder is made with 100% recycled plexiglass.  Plexiglass is essentially acrylic, and this is a high-grade plastic material which is resistant to weathering.  In addition, if acrylic is scratched, the scratches can be easily buffed out.

This anti squirrel bird feeder features a 17-inch diameter dome which helps protect the seed from different weather elements such as rain and snow.  Furthermore, and perhaps most importantly, this dome prevents the squirrels from snatching the seeds.

The Arundale Sky Cafe has a wide tray that can accommodate up to 10 birds at once.  And, it comes with a 1.5 gallon seed bucket which will reduce the number of refills needed.

For mounting purposes, the Arundale Sky Cafe can be hung or pole mounted.  Furthermore, if you choose to hang the Sky Cafe, it is recommended that you hang it 5 inches or more from the nearest object, whether it be a tree trunk or a house.  If you choose to pole mount it, it is recommended that it is mounted at least 5 inches from the ground.

In addition, if you are using a chain to hang the Arundale Sky Cafe, allow at least 6 inches of chain above the feeder.  This will further deter the squirrels from trying to access the seeds.

Finally, this anti squirrel bird feeder measures 17 inches in diameter and weighs roughly 5 pounds, without seeds.

Pros:

This bird feeder is well designed and uses acrylic, which is a durable, all-weather material.

And, among consumers, there is a unanimous vote that this bird feeder repels squirrels and repels them good.

Furthermore, consumers state this bird feeder attracts a lot of birds, as well as, a large variety of birds.  In addition, the perching tray allows the birds plenty of room to spread out and move about.

Cons:

It is a bit spend-ier than other bird feeders, however, there’s no denying that this bird feeder has an excellent squirrel-proof design and is beautiful to look at.

 

Droll Yankees Yankee Flipper Squirrel Proof Bird Feeder

Droll Yankees Yankee Flipper Squirrel Proof Bird Feeder

This anti squirrel bird feeder is one entertaining feeder.  The Droll Yankees Yankee Flipper Squirrel Proof Bird Feeder works by spinning the squirrel off.  When the squirrel mounts the weight-activated perch ring, it triggers the motor and the feeder starts spinning.  This will knock the squirrels off the feeder and the squirrels won’t be coming back for more.

And, if the squirrels try to perch from the top to access the food, the feeder tube is too long for them to reach the seed.

The spinning motor works via rechargeable and replaceable batteries.  Simply charge the batteries overnight and the batteries will run for months.

The Droll Yankees Flipper Squirrel Proof Bird Feeder is made of polycarbonate with a heavy metal cap and perch ring.  According to Plastics Make it Possible, polycarbonate is durable and shatter-resistant.  In addition, this polycarbonate bird feeder is UV-stabilized to retain its appearance and prevent discoloration.

This anti squirrel bird feeder contains 4 feeding ports which will accommodate small and large birds alike.  Furthermore, it has a 5 pound seed capacity to keep you stocked up for longer.  And, it has an internal baffle system which will prevent seed blockage when delivering the seed to the port.

Lastly, the Droll Yankee Flipper Bird Feeder measures 4.75 inches in diameter and 21 inches tall.  It is recommended you secure the feeder 6 feet from the nearest object.

Pros:

If you’re buying this for entertainment purposes, you may find the entertainment to be short-lived.  This is because the Droll Yankees Yankee Flipper Squirrel Proof Bird Feeder works so well, squirrels quickly learn to stay away.

Cons:

A few consumers have stated the battery doesn’t hold its charge for very long after about a year of usage.

In addition, a few consumers have stated the squirrels outsmarted this bird feeder.

 

The Nuttery NT066 Classic Peanut Sunflower Seed Feeder

The Nuttery NT066 Classic Peanut Sunflower Seed Feeder

This pick for best squirrel proof bird feeder has its own unique design to keep the pesky critter out.  The Nuttery NT066 Classic Peanut Sunflower Seed Feeder features a cage-like design which prevents the squirrel from reaching the food.

This bird feeder is made with strong metal with a twist lid to easily refill the nuts and seeds.  Furthermore, this metal is durable and will withstand attempted squirrel break-ins and years of weather abuse.

The Nuttery Classic Feeder has a seed capacity of 1.73 pounds which means infrequent refills.  And, to refill this feeder, simply twist the lid and pour the seeds and nuts in.

This squirrel proof bird feeder is perfect for attracting a smaller breed of bird.  However, if you’re looking to feed larger birds, you may want to try another pick.

The Nuttery measures 7.9 inches in diameter and 14.2 inches tall.

Pros:

The Nuttery can handle nuts and seeds without clogging the ports.

Furthermore, this pick for best squirrel proof bird feeder is made of strong metal which will prevent the squirrels from chewing their way to the food.

Cons:

A couple of consumers have issues with this bird feeder rusting after about a year’s worth of use.

Heritage Farms Woodlink Absolute Squirrel Resistant Bird Feeder Model 7533

Heritage Farms Woodlink Absolute Squirrel Resistant Bird Feeder Model 7533

Our last pick for best squirrel proof bird feeder is a heavy-duty option.  The Heritage Farms Woodlink Absolute Squirrel Resistant Bird Feeder is constructed of all steel.  The green powder-coated steel body is chew proof and will help protect the feeder from weather elements.  In addition, the zinc-plated steel hanger and black powder-coated pole is also weather resistant.

This pick for best squirrel proof bird feeder deters squirrels by using a spring-activated perch.  The perch detects the squirrel’s weight and will shut off the seed supply, preventing the squirrel from feasting on the bird seed.  Furthermore, this bird feeder has a counter balanced perch, where you can set one of three positions to allow small, medium or large-sized birds to access the seed.  If the wrong sized bird perches, the seed supply will shut off.

In addition to the spring-activated perch, the Heritage Farms Woodlink Absolute Bird Feeder will further deter squirrels with a locking, squirrel-resistant roof.  This roof also helps to keep the seed dry and protected from weather elements.

This anti squirrel bird feeder comes with a 15 pound seed capacity to keep refills to a minimum.  In addition, it comes with a metal hangar and a 5 foot pole, so you can choose how you would like to display the feeder.

Finally, the Heritage Farms Woodlink Absolute Squirrel Resistant Bird Feeder measures 13.5 inches long, 16 inches wide and 11.2 inches tall.  It weighs approximately 12 pounds.

Pros:

This squirrel proof bird feeder is very well constructed and made with ultra durable materials.

In addition, this feeder has customers raving about how squirrel proof it is.

Cons:

A few consumers have stated that the 5 foot mounting pole is rather short which deters birds from feasting.

 

best portable charcoal grill

Best Portable Charcoal Grill and Propane Grill

So, you’re on the hunt for the best portable charcoal grill or propane grill for the ultimate summer excursions.  Well, there are a few things to look out for when purchasing the best portable charcoal grill or propane grill – and we’ll take you through the ins and outs of finding the right grill for you.

The first step into purchasing the best charcoal or propane grill is to decide if you’re going to want to go with charcoal or propane.  And, there’s really no clear winner between the two, however, there may be personal preferences that will help you through this decision-making process.  

What’s the Difference Between a Charcoal and a Propane Grill?

Let’s start with taste and texture.  Charcoal grills get much hotter than gas grills, therefore, you will see some serious searing action with a charcoal grill.  So, if you’re looking for a crunchy outer texture, charcoal grill hands-down.

In addition, charcoal grills produce more smoke and this smoke transfers flavor.  According to AmazingRibs.com, with charcoal, you will be burning more complex organic molecules which will give you a broader range of flavor compared to a propane grill.

This is not to say that you won’t be grilling some delicious hamburgers on a propane grill.  Quite the opposite, in fact.  However, if you’re looking for that outdoorsy, smoke-infused taste, a charcoal grill is the way to go.

best portable charcoal grill

As far as convenience goes, propane grills seem to win this battle.  Propane grills light with a flick of switch or a turn of a knob while charcoal grills take a lot more effort.  And, propane grills will reach desired heat at approximately 10 minutes while charcoal grills reach desired heat at approximately 20 minutes.

When it comes to cleanup, charcoal grills are far more messy because you have the ash to deal with.  So, a propane grill wins the clean-up convenience factor.

Finally, decide if you will be grilling year round.  Propane grills are the clear winner for every season while charcoal grills are more difficult to light in the colder months.  And, sometimes it’s too cold or too windy to get them to light at all.

So, hopefully you’ve been able to come to some sort of conclusion on which type of grill is going to work best for you.  And, if you haven’t, maybe just taking a browse through our picks for best portable charcoal grill and best portable propane grill will help you on your way – whether it be a portability factor or even the aesthetic of a grill that catches your eye.  

 

Best Portable Charcoal Grill and Propane Grill

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Weber 51010001 Q1200 Liquid Propane Grill
Weber
51010001 Q1200 Liquid Propane Grill
Propane
Porcelain-Enameled
Cast Iron
Cast Aluminum
Split Grates
Side Trays
Disposable Drip Tray
Color Options
20.5" x 40.9" x 24.6"
Weber 10020 Smokey Joe 14-Inch Portable Grill
Weber
10020 Smokey Joe 14-Inch Portable Grill
Charcoal
Porcelain-Enameled
Plated Steel
Heavy-Gauge Steel
Ash Catcher
15.6" x 15.6" x 9"
Coleman Road Trip Propane Portable Grill LXE
Coleman
Road Trip Propane Portable Grill LXE
Propane
Porcelain-Coated
Cast Iron
Split Grates
Side Trays
Removable Grease Tray
Lift and Lock System
Color Options
33.8" x 13.5" x 19.1"
Gourmia GBQ330 Portable Charcoal Electric BBQ Grill
Gourmia
GBQ330 Portable Charcoal Electric BBQ Grill
Charcoal
Battery-Operated
Non-Stick Grill Plate
Turbo Fan
Removable Drip Pan
Carrying Case
14" x 13.5" x 8"
Pinty Portable Folding Charcoal Grill
Pinty
Portable Folding Charcoal Grill
Charcoal
Porcelain-Enameled
Carbon Steel
Silicone Handles
Ash Catcher
22" x 15.7" x 15.4"
Char-Griller 2-2424 Table Top Charcoal Grill
Char-Griller
2-2424 Table Top Charcoal Grill
Charcoal
Cast Iron
Heavy Steel
Removable Ash Pan
Smoker Option
18.5" x 16" x 17"

 

Best Portable Charcoal Grill and Propane Grill

Weber 51010001 Q1200 Liquid Propane Grill

Weber 51010001 Q1200 Liquid Propane Grill

Our first pick for best portable propane grill comes from one of the top outdoor grill companies around.  Weber was established around 1952 with the invention of the kettle grill.  Since then, Weber has become a household name due to innovation and quality and their name is synonymous with grilling.

The Weber 51010001 Q1200 Liquid Propane Grill is built of porcelain-enameled cast iron with a cast aluminum lid and body.  And, according to Crown Variety, the benefit to grilling with cast iron is the cast iron will retain a large amount of heat.  Furthermore, because the cast iron is coated in porcelain, this means it will protect the cast iron from erosion and rust, extending the life of the grill.

In addition, cast iron is known to clean up quickly and easily.  And, along with the disposable and replaceable drip trays, this is one of the easiest propane grills to clean.

The Weber Liquid Propane Grill lights up instantly and is reliable in just about all-weather conditions.  Once lit, you can then adjust the control burner valve to any temperature from low to high.

And, with this pick for best portable propane grill, you get the luxury of split grates.  Split grates are two separate grates that, when put together, become one.  Furthermore, when purchased separately, you can add a griddle grate for cooking items such as scrambled eggs, hash browns and paninis.

The Weber Liquid Propane Grill is lightweight and folds up easily for portability.  And, it comes with side trays that fold up over the grill when not in use.

This portable grill is the perfect size for transporting and the perfect size for a small balcony.  So, if you’re looking for a grill that works just as well at home as it does on the road, this pick is superb.

Finally, the measurements of this grill completely expanded with the lid open and the side tables out is 24.6 inches tall, 40.9 inches wide and 20.5 inches deep.  With the lid closed and the tables out, this grill measures 15.5 inches tall, 40.9 inches wide and 16.5 inches deep.  And, it comes in your choice of colors:  Fuchsia, Black, Blue, Green, Orange, Purple, Red, Titanium or Florida State Maroon.

Pros:

This pick for best portable propane grill is the perfect size for taking it on the road or using on a small porch or balcony.  And, to make matters even better, if you have a standing grill in mind, you can add-on this portable cart.

Furthermore, the Weber Liquid Propane Grill lights easily and heats up quickly.  And, while cooking, this grill retains an even cooking temperature throughout, including an even cooking surface.  Once grilling is done, cleanup is a cinch.

Cons:

There’s not much negative to be said about this grill.  It cooks flawlessly, heats up reliably and folds up nicely.  However, one small flaw prevents this grill from being a ten.  The regulator is located next to one of the handles, which makes it rather awkward and difficult to carry.

Weber 10020 Smokey Joe 14-Inch Portable Grill

Weber 10020 Smokey Joe 14-Inch Portable Grill

This pick for best portable charcoal grill is a classic and an all-time favorite.  And, according to the Weber Kettle Club, the Weber Smokey Joe Grill was first introduced in 1955, and was Weber’s first portable, tabletop grill.  Furthermore, it has kept the same basic design for over half a century.

The Weber 10020 Smokey Joe 14-Inch Portable Grill features a plated steel cooking grate and a heavy-gauge steel charcoal grate.  The plated steel cooking grate is durable and easy to clean.  Furthermore, the plated steel cooking grate has the ability to produce some serious sear marks.

In addition, this portable grill features a porcelain-enameled bowl and lid.  This will help to prevent rust and will enable heat to transfer evenly.

To keep things clean, the Weber Smokey Joe comes with an aluminum ash catcher.  Once the ash catcher is full, simply scoop the ash out and you’re ready for another round of grilling.

This pick for best portable grill measures roughly 12 inches tall and 15.6 inches in diameter.  The cooking grate measures 14.5 inches in diameter, enough to fit 3 steaks or 6 burgers at a time.  However, if you’re looking for something a bit larger in size, you can always go with the 18-inch model, which you can find here.

Finally, this portable grill transports easily.  Simply place the lid on the grill and latch it shut.  And, if you think things may get a little messy in the process, Weber offers a handy carrying bag which you can conveniently strap over your shoulder.

Pros:

Weber makes quality products and this Smokey Joe Portable Grill is just another one of their reliable products they offer.

So, if you’re looking for a basic, no-frills grill, this pick is most likely your best bet.  Plus, the price is right.

Cons:

This grill is lacking handles.  And, for the life of us, we can’t figure out why something so simple and convenient was left out of the design.  However, you can always carry a pair of gloves with this grill to help protect your hands and maneuver it if you must.

Coleman Road Trip Propane Portable Grill LXE

Coleman Road Trip Propane Portable Grill LXE

We are in love with this design.  This is as close to the look and feel of an outdoor home grill.  The Coleman Road Trip Propane Portable Grill LXE is a collapsible grill that will fit in most trunks.  And, it features a lift and lock system which allows for set up within seconds.

This pick for best portable propane grill offers 2 porcelain-coated cast iron grilling plates.  These plates are easy to clean and will last for a very long time.  And, according to Grill Beast, cast iron is extremely efficient at retaining heat for long periods of time.  Furthermore, the sear marks cast iron produces are to die for.

And with these grill plates, they can be interchangeable with a griddle plate for scrambled eggs or whatever your heart desires.

The Coleman Road Trip Propane Portable Grill offers a lot of cooking power with 10,000 BTUs for each burner.  BTU, or British Thermal Unit, is a unit of measure given off by a gas burner.  For instance, a home stove has around 7,000 BTUs per burner.  So, 10,000 BTUs is a seriously good amount of heat for some grilling.

This portable grill features an Instastart Button which will enable you to light the grill without a lighter.  And, once lit, this grill can run for an hour on one of the 16.4 ounce propane cylinders.

Other features of the Coleman Road Trip Grill is a removable grease tray for easy cleanup and the convenient sliding side tables.

Finally, this grill measures 33.8 inches long, 13.5 inches wide, 19.1 inches tall and weighs roughly 50 pounds.  And, you get your choice of color:  Black, Blue, Green, Maroon, Orange, Purple, Red or Silver.

Pros:

The portability of this grill, while having the appearance of a regular-sized grill, is unheard of.  And, when speaking of the portability, did we bring attention to the wheels?

Furthermore, the setup of this grill is literally in seconds.  No hassle, no fuss, it just props right up.

Cons:

Because this grill has cast iron grilling plates, it’s going to take a lot longer to clean than grills with steel grates.  

Another con to this grill, it is rather heavy at 50 pounds.  Just make sure you have the manpower to transport this to and from the trunk.

Gourmia GBQ330 Portable Charcoal Electric BBQ Grill

Gourmia GBQ330 Portable Charcoal Electric BBQ Grill

This pick for best portable charcoal grill is an electric pick, looks-wise and function-wise.  The Gourmia BGQ330 Portable Charcoal Electric BBQ Grill is battery and coal-operated.  Simply place the charcoal in the small charcoal box, light the ignition and adjust the Smart Turbo Fan to control the strength of the flame.

This Smart Turbo Fan is a fabulous addition.  Not only does it control the strength of the flame, it also controls the airflow.  This allows for minimal charcoal and minimal smoke output.

The Gourmia GBQ330 Portable Charcoal Electric BBQ Grill features a non stick grill plate that is easy to clean.  In addition, this electric charcoal grill comes with a double grill pan system that helps eliminates drip.  Furthermore, it has a removable drip pan and all the electronic elements are removable for the convenience of cleaning.

Lastly, this pick for best portable charcoal grill has a circumference of 37.39 inches with an 11.90 inch grilling surface.  And, it comes with a travel case with a shoulder strap for easy portability.

Pros:

The cleanup process of this grill is flawless.  You can easily get to every crease and crevice without much hassle.

In addition, this grill is extremely efficient and doesn’t burn much charcoal, making it cost-effective.

Cons:

The grill plate is on the thin side and can bend rather easily.

Furthermore, some consumers say the heat does not distribute evenly and tends to focus on the center of the grill.

 

Pinty Portable Folding Charcoal Grill

Pinty Portable Folding Charcoal Grill

If you’re looking to grill for a group of people and still want the portability factor, this pick for best portable charcoal grill is one to consider.  The Pinty Portable Folding Charcoal Grill features 250 square inches of grill space which can accommodate anywhere from 5 to 7 people.  And, 250 square inches comes out to 18.5 inches wide by 13.5 inches deep of grill space.

This charcoal grill is made of carbon steel with a dust proof surface.  Carbon steel is known for its durability and strength.  In addition, the Pinty Portable Folding Charcoal Grill comes with porcelain-enameled grates which will help protect the grilling surface from rust while being easy to clean.  And, to protect your extremities, this grill comes with heat-resistant silicone handles.

This pick for best portable charcoal grill comes with 7 air vents for dust and ash discharge and will create the ultimate ventilation.  It also comes equipped with an ash catcher underneath the grilling grates.  And, to remove the ash, you simply remove the grates and turn the grill upside down.

Finally, even though this grill can accommodate a group of people, it is still highly portable.  With the legs expanded, this grill measures 22 inches long, 15.7 inches wide and 15.4 inches tall.  It’s fully foldable so the legs can tuck underneath the grill.  And, you can carry it away by one of the silicone handles.

Pros:

This is one sturdy little grill.  And, we’re not sure if we should be calling it little as it can feed a family at once.

So, with this pick for best portable charcoal grill, you’re getting the best of three worlds:  Durability, portability and a large grilling space.

Cons:

While this grill is made with carbon steel, some consumers felt it wasn’t as heavy-duty as they thought it would be.

 

Char-Griller 2-2424 Table Top Charcoal Grill

Char-Griller 2-2424 Table Top Charcoal Grill

Our final pick for best portable charcoal grill can also be used as a Texas-style smoker.  However, once you use this as a smoker, you cannot go back to using it as a grill.  

The Char-Griller 2-2424 Table Top Charcoal Grill is constructed of heavy steel with cast iron cooking grates.  So, you’re looking at durability all around.  And, with the cast iron cooking grates, you’re looking at some seriously fabulous grilled foods.  In addition, like we mentioned before, cast iron cleans up easily and quickly.

This portable charcoal grill is another pick that offers a large amount of grilling space.  The cooking grates have 250 square inches of real estate, enough to feed anywhere from 5 to 7 people.

A couple of other features include a removable ash pan for easy and convenient cleanup and a Stay Cool handle to protect your extremities from heat.

For portability purposes, what you see is what you get.  Just pick it up and go.  The Char-Griller 2-2424 Table Top Charcoal Grill measures 18.5 inches long, 16 inches wide and 17 inches tall.  It weighs approximately 41 pounds.

Pros:

This pick for best portable charcoal grill is well-constructed and made with some of the most durable materials available.  From the cast iron cooking grates to the heavy steel construction, you may be looking at a grill for a lifetime.

Furthermore, if you ever want to try your hand at some smoked fish or sausage, this grill would be your opportunity.  However, just remember you can’t go back to using this as a regular grill once you use it as a smoker.

Cons:

Some consumers have had issues with the paint coming off after the first couple of uses.  But, it’s important to note that some consumers haven’t had any issues.

best l shaped desk

Best L Shaped Desk for the Home or Office

If you’re on the hunt for the best L shaped desk for the home or office, we found 6 aesthetically pleasing desks that are durable and made with absolute quality.

In addition, these desks come in a range of prices to meet every consumer’s needs.  Therefore, if you’re on the lower end of the budget, we found the best L shaped desk that, in our opinion, looks the best – while being able to stand the test of time.  If you’re on the higher end of the budget, we found the best L shaped desks that are built with top quality materials, and will, not only look fabulous, but feel fabulous.

So, besides meeting your budget and aesthetic, what else should you look for in the best L shaped desk?

Under the assumption this desk will be used for work, the desk should draw inspiration.  This can happen a couple of different ways.  You can choose a desk that is designed in such a way that is pleasing to the eye or you can choose a desk that is so minimal, your work will be the focal point.

best l shaped desk

Therefore, a good question to ask yourself is, when you look at your desk, what do you want to see?  Do you want your work to stand out or your surroundings to stand out?  For some people, the work they do is aesthetically pleasing in nature, and these consumers tend to go with a simple design so as to not take away from their work.  Others, on the other hand, have more data driven work and these consumers tend to go with a more aesthetically pleasing desk.

Next, consider how much storage space you will need.  Do you need a filing cabinet?  How about a keyboard pullout?  Or, perhaps everything is stored on your computer and you just need extra counter space for a printer and a lamp.

Finally, be sure to take measurements.  The last thing you want to do is buy a desk and have to return it because the darn thing won’t fit.  And, with L shaped desks, pay close attention to if the L is on the right or the left of the desk.  Having the L shape on the wrong side can result in an annoying return.

So, once you have your needs all figured out, you’re ready to narrow down your options.  And, our picks for the best L shape desk should propel you on your way.

 

Best L Shaped Desk

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Ashley Furniture Signature Design Lobink L-Shaped Home Office Desk
Ashley Furniture Signature Design
Lobink L-Shaped Home Office Desk
Wood
Manmade Wood
Veneer
L/R Arrangement
60" x 56" x 30"
Sauder Costa L-Desk Chc A2
Sauder
Costa L-Desk Chc A2
Engineered Wood
Veneer
3 Drawers
Filing Rails
Keyboard Shelf
Grommet Holes
65.12" x 65.12" x 30"
DECHO DESIGN Modern L-Shaped Corner Computer Desk
DECHO DESIGN
Modern L-Shaped Corner Computer Desk
MDF Board
Steel Frame
Color Options
56" x 56" x 20.5"
Simpli Home Sawhorse Solid Wood L-Shape Corner Desk
Simpli Home
Sawhorse Solid Wood L-Shape Corner Desk
Pine
Keyboard Shelf
Color Options
84" x 80" x 30"
Sauder 420606 Palladia L-Desk Vo A2 Computer Desk
Sauder
420606 Palladia L-Desk Vo A2 Computer Desk
Engineered Wood
Veneer
4 Drawers
Filing Rails
Keyboard Shelf
Grommet Holes
68.7" x 65.1" x 29.6"
Merax 59-Inch L-Shaped Desk
Merax
59-Inch L-Shaped Desk
MDF Board
Steel Frame
Color Options
59" x 55" x 29.9"

 

Best L Shaped Desk

Ashley Furniture Signature Design Lobink L-Shaped Home Office Desk

Ashley Furniture Signature Design Lobink L-Shaped Home Office Desk

Simple, unassuming and a great fit for a traditional, classic, industrial or modern space.  And, actually, the simplicity of the Ashley Furniture Signature Design Lobink L-Shaped Home Office Desk can work with just about every aesthetic.

This pick for best L shaped desk measures 60 inches wide, 30 inches tall and 56 inches in diameter.  In addition, as an added bonus, this desk can be arranged on the left or right hand side.

The Ashley Furniture Signature Design Lobink L-Shaped Desk is made of wood, manmade wood and veneer.  And, it is made extremely sturdy which is crucial for those heavier items, such as a TV or a printer.  In addition, because it is made extremely sturdy, this desk will last for years to come.  And, of course, through all of that abuse work puts us through.

Finally, the assembly required is fairly easy.  However, it is a whole lot easier with 2 people on the task.

Pros:

This L shaped desk is very well made and sturdy.  This means there’s no wobble and the desk is made to handle heavier items.  

Furthermore, it is made with a quality hand-applied wood finish.  This will help protect it against scratches and stains.

Cons:

There’s not many cons to this desk.  The price is extremely gracious for what you get.  However, a few consumers have stated that assembly wasn’t that easy.  And, a couple of consumers didn’t receive the necessary tools to assemble the desk.

 

Sauder Costa L-Desk Chc A2

Sauder Costa L-Desk Chc A2

This L shaped, corner desk is great for elegant, classic and/or country decor.  The Sauder Costa L-Desk Chc A2 is also great for those who need extra storage.  This L shaped desk features 3 drawers, a keyboard shelf and filing rails.  And, the keyboard shelf can be assembled on either side of the L shape.

Furthermore, the bottom of the desk features a storage area with an adjustable shelf.  This adjustable shelf is perfect for storing a modem, speakers and/or a computer tower.  And, as an added feature, the top of the desk comes with grommet holes that will help manage cords and keep the desk free of cord clutter. 

The Sauder Costa L-Desk is made with engineered wood and thick-grained veneer, topped with a chalked chestnut finish.  And, this desk is finished on all sides so you’re not stuck propping it against the wall.

Finally, this L shaped corner desk measures 65.12 inches wide, 30 inches tall and 65.12 inches in diameter.  While the depth of the desk is 23.25 inches deep.

Pros:

The Sauder Costa L-Desk is extremely well made with sturdy construction. 

And, this desk offers plenty of storage.  But, if you’re looking for more storage or a whole office set, you can find the matching hut here, the matching file cabinet here and the matching chest here.

Cons:

Although this desk is easy to assemble, it does take awhile.  With some consumers estimating around 4 hours.

 

DECHO DESIGN Modern L-Shaped Corner Computer Desk

DECHO DESIGN Modern L-Shaped Corner Computer Desk

Our next pick for best L shaped desk for the home or office is perfect for modern spaces.  And, it comes in your choice of colors:  Oak and White Leg or Walnut and Black Leg.

In addition, because it is modern a modern design, it doesn’t offer much storage.  However, if you need extra storage, you can always add in a roll away filing cabinet like pictured above.  You can find the one DECHO DESIGN makes here or you can spice it up with some of these.

The DECHO DESIGN Modern L-Shaped Corner Computer Desk measures 20.5 inches wide, 29.93 inches tall and 56 inches in diameter.  Furthermore, it is constructed of MDF board with a thick steel frame.  And, this desk has a capacity to hold 300 lbs.  So, feel free to stack your monitors on top.

Finally, this desk is easy to assemble and come with instructions and tools to help get the job done.

Pros:

The DECHO DESIGN Modern L-Shaped Corner Computer Desk is strong and sturdy.  And, the design is great for minimal and modern spaces.

In addition, if you’re looking for a space-saving pick, this one’s a great fit.

Cons:

If you’re looking for the real deal, AKA wood, you may want to go with another pick.  This is made with MDF board, which is medium-density fiberboard.  And, although it is sturdy, many people crave the aesthetic of real wood.

Simpli Home Sawhorse Solid Wood L-Shape Corner Desk

Simpli Home Sawhorse Solid Wood L-Shape Corner Desk

This pick for best L shaped desk is one of our favorites and we can’t help but see ourselves completely in our element with this one.

The Simpli Home Sawhorse Solid Wood L-Shape Corner Desk is constructed in the classic sawhorse style with solid pine.  This solid pine is finished with a medium Saddle Brown stain and a NC Lacquer to protect the wood from scratches and stains.  You also have your pick of colors:  Saddle Brown, Dark Chestnut Brown or Distressed Grey.

This L shaped desk doesn’t come with storage so it’s great for those who are minimalists at work.  However, it does come with a built-in keyboard tray to help further keep things to a minimum.

This desk comes in three main pieces:  desk, corner piece and thick side desk.  The desk measures 60 inches long, 30 inches tall and 24 inches deep.  The corner piece measures 24 inches long and 24 inches deep, while the thick side desk measures 56 inches long, 30 inches tall and 24 inches deep.  With all that said, this is a fairly large desk so it’s great for those that like to spread out.

Pros:

The Simpli Home Sawhorse Solid Wood L-Shape Corner Desk is handcrafted and made with solid pine.  Need we say more?  Yes indeed!  This desk is absolutely stunning.

In addition, the assembly of this desk is easy.  The directions are straight-forward and clear and the hardware is clearly marked.

Cons:

Pine is softer than other woods and it tends to dent more easily.  Some people will purchase pine just for this fact, while others like to keep their wood looking brand new.  If you’re the type that likes their wood looking fresh, you can always invest in some desk pads for protection.

 

Sauder 420606 Palladia L-Desk Vo A2 Computer Desk

Sauder 420606 Palladia L-Desk Vo A2 Computer Desk

This pick is for someone looking for much-needed storage.  The Sauder 420606 Palladia L-Desk Vo A2 Computer Desk features 4 drawers, with one drawer set up for hanging files.  In addition, this L shaped desk comes with a shelf drawer for a keyboard and hidden storage which has an adjustable shelf.  This shelf is perfect for a computer tower, modem and/or speakers.

Furthermore, the top of the desk has grommet cords to keep the desk free of cord clutter. 

This traditional-style L shaped desk is made of engineered wood.  More specifically, it is made of high-quality hardwood and softwood residuals.  It is then bonded with synthetic resin and topped with a Vintage Oak laminate finish.

The Sauder Palladia L-Desk measures roughly 68.7 inches long on each side and 29.5 inches tall.

Pros:

This is one solid piece of furniture.  And, it weighs a whopping 271 pounds.  So, you can be rest assured that this table is going to hold the heavier pieces of equipment and then some.

Cons:

Although assembly is fairly easy, it’s going to take some time to put together.  Most consumers estimate between 4 and 6 hours.

However, once this desk is put together, it’s well worth it.

Merax 59-Inch L-Shaped Desk

Merax 59-Inch L-Shaped Desk

Our last pick for best L shaped desk is as minimal as you can get – price-wise and style-wise.  The Merax 59-Inch L-Shaped Desk is so unassuming, it will fit with just about any decor.

This L shaped desk is made with MDF with powder-coated steel legs.  The MDF is scratch resistant and cleans up easily while the durable, steel cantilever legs help keep the desk stable.

The Merax 59-Inch L-Shaped Desk measures 59 inches wide, 55 inches deep and 29.9 inches tall.  And, if you like this desk but you’re not so enthralled with the color, you can find different color schemes here and here.

Pros:

If you’re on a super-duper budget, this is a great pick.  It’s strong and will hold heavier equipment.

Furthermore, because it’s modern and unassuming, it’s going to look good in any space.

Lastly, most consumers agree, this desk is easy to assemble.

Cons:

Although this desk is strong, it is iffy in the sturdy department.  And, when we say sturdy, we mean wobble.  A couple of consumers have stated that it wobbles slightly when used on carpet.  So, perhaps your floor dressing is something to take into account before purchase.

how to make bath bombs

How to Make Bath Bombs

If you’ve gotten sucked into the bath bomb craze, you know exactly how rejuvenating these little guys can be.  If you haven’t, you’re in for the ultimate luxurious treat.  And, in this post, we are going to take you on a journey on how to make bath bombs, for bath bomb beginners and veterans alike.

For those that are just getting started, bath bombs are amazing.  They will help soften and moisturize your skin and you will reap the benefit of essential oils.

how to make bath bombs

So, we’ve got to give major props to this scientific experiment gone right.  Not only are bath bombs great for our skin and our general well-being, they add an element of surprise every time the bombs start to fizz away and dissolve in the bath water.  And, they turn a rather mundane bath experience into a lively and perplexing, yet relaxing, down time.

For those that are new to these fizzy creatures, you may ask, how do I get started with this magical bath treatment?  Well, there’s 2 ways:  you can follow our precise instructions and learn how to make bath bombs or you can buy some.

The benefit to making your own bath bombs is you can customize them down to the very last drop of essential oil.  On the other hand, the benefit of buying some is you don’t have to do the work and they come in delightful, gift-like packaging.

So, if you would like to bypass the process of making your own bath bombs, you can find our picks for the 5 best bath bombs here.  If you would like to try your hand at making your own, continue on to our fabulous bath bomb recipe below.

 

How to Make Bath Bombs

The infograph above shows a simplified way on how to make bath bombs and can be used for an easy reference once you’ve got the details down. But first, let us take you through the ins and outs, as well as the dos and don’ts, of how to make bath bombs.

What You Will Need:  Bath Bomb Ingredients*

  • 1 cup baking soda
  • 1/2 cup citric acid
  • 1/2 cup Epsom Salt
  • 1 tsp mineral water
  • 3 tsp coconut oil
  • 2 tsp essential oils

What You Will Need:  Supplies*

  • Medium bowl
  • Small bowl
  • Whisk
  • Bath bomb mold

*If you need a recommendation for some of these ingredients or supplies, we have a list of our favorites at the bottom of this article.

Bath Bomb Recipe

Step 1:  In a medium bowl, whisk together the dry ingredients.  This includes the baking soda, citric acid and Epsom salt.  Set aside.

Step 2:  In a small bowl, combine the mineral water, coconut oil and essential oils.  (Note:  Most recipes call for food coloring.  However, due to the unnatural state of food coloring, for health purposes, we opt not to use it.)

Step 3:  Slowly add the wet mixture in with the dry mixture and combine.  You will want to achieve a wet, sandy texture.  So, you may need to add in a little more oil to achieve this.

Step 4:  Place the bath bomb mixture in the molds and let dry.  If you find the bath bombs are having a tough time drying, you may want to put them into the freezer and that should do the trick.

Step 5:  Now that you know how to make bath bombs, it’s time to bathe.  Use one bath bomb for one tub full of water.  

Recommendations

While most of the ingredients and supplies you can easily find lying around the pantry or sitting on the shelf in the grocery store in your favorite aisle, a few of these aren’t so cut and dry.  So, in order to help steer you in the right direction, here’s our picks for our favorite not-so-common ingredients and our pick for the elusive bath bomb molds:

Best Bath Bomb Molds

AMXTOP DIY Metal Bath Bomb Mold

AMXTOP DIY Metal Bath Bomb Mold

There are a few advantages to these bath bomb molds.  First and foremost, these bath bomb molds offer 3 different sizes:  1.8 inch, 2.2 inch and 2.6 inch.  In addition, they are heavy-duty and durable so they will keep their shape for longer.  Lastly, and certainly the most important advantage to these bath bomb molds is, they are BPA free.  This will help to eliminate any contact with the chemical Bisphenol-A, which mimics the estrogen hormone and can cause numerous health issues.

Citric Acid for Bath Bombs

HaleFRESH Premium Food Grade Citric Acid

HaleFRESH Premium Food Grade Citric Acid

Citric Acid is a common food ingredient and something that you can easily find in the grocery store.  However, we have been using this particular premium grade citric acid and our bath bombs have turned out perfectly fizzy.  And, not only are they fizzy, this citric acid is made with high quality, 100% citric acid.  This means no fillers or anti-caking agents.  Furthermore, this citric acid is also approved for organic foods, which attests to the quality of this product.

Best Essential Oils for Bath Bombs

Just about any essential oil will do.  However, you may want to customize the oils in accordance with your needs.

For instance, if you’re looking to unwind, you will want to choose an essential oil that will help you do just that.  If your skin feels rather dry, you will want to pick an essential oil that’s heavy on the hydration properties.  And, if you’re looking for an anti-aging treatment, there are some beneficial essential oils that will target this particular regimen.  (For more in-depth knowledge on which anti-aging essential oils may work best for you, check out our guide for combatting wrinkles and obtaining more youthful skin.)

To get you started, here’s a simplified version of the most popular essential oils and what they can do for you:

  • Lavender:  Relax, unwind and de-stress
  • Peppermint:  Stimulate and rejuvenate
  • Hibiscus:  Relax, calm and de-stress
  • Rosemary:  Invigorate and energize
  • Sea Buckthorn:  Normalize moisture levels and improve skin elasticity
  • Frankincense:  Normalize oily skin
  • Rosewood:  Tranquil, calm and hydrate
  • Pomegranate Seed:  Detox, hydrate and normalize

Typically, we add a moisturizing essential oil along with a mood-type oil.  For instance, we will mix peppermint with the hydrating pomegranate seed or we will mix hibiscus with the skin normalizing frankincense.

And, because we love variety, we chose to go with an essential oil set.   This set helps us mix, match and customize our baths down to our skin’s needs and our current state of mind.

Natrogix Nirvana Essential Oil Set

Natrogix Nirvana Essential Oil Set

This therapeutic grade essential oil set will give you lots of opportunity to create the ultimate bath bomb mixtures.  And, this is because it comes with a whopping 18 essential oils.  Choose from eucalyptus, frankincense, lavender, lemongrass, lemon, rosemary, sweet orange, tea tree, peppermint, turmeric, tangerine, ylang ylang, basil, cedarwood, spearmint, bergamot, copaiba balsam and cinnamon leaf.

And, just like our other recommended products, we aim for quality and health-conscious products.  So, these oils are GC/MS certified and made without pesticides, herbicides, GMOs and other additives.

best coffee maker with grinder

Best Coffee Maker with Grinder – Top 4 Programmable Picks

There’s nothing better than fresh ground coffee and fresh brewed coffee – except for the best coffee maker with grinder.  And, this is a device where you can have both nearly simultaneously.

So, what are the advantages of having a coffee maker with grinder?  First off, like we mentioned above, you get fresh ground and fresh brewed coffee back to back.  So, if you thought the smell of coffee brewing was heavenly before, this just makes it all smell a whole lot richer.

Next, there isn’t one person who would love to save on cupboard space and counter space.  And, when you have a separate grinder and a separate coffee maker, things get a little clunky and cluttered.  Therefore, the best coffee maker with grinder will save you precious room in the kitchen.

Another added bonus of having a 2-in-1 coffee maker and grinder is less mess.  We all know from grinding coffee in a separate grinder, things tend to get messy.  With a coffee maker and grinder, the grounds go directly from the grinder into the filter.  So, say goodbye to grounds spilling onto the countertop.

Finally, and perhaps best of all, our picks for best coffee maker with grinder are all programmable.  This means they will grind and brew the coffee while you’re working on getting out of bed.  And, there’s nothing like waking up to the smell of fresh ground and brewed coffee.

 

Best Coffee Maker with Grinder

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Capresso 464.05 CoffeeTeam GS 10-Cup Digital Coffeemaker with Concial Burr Grinder
Capresso
464.05 CoffeeTeam GS 10-Cup Digital Coffeemaker with Concial Burr Grinder
Programmable
Automatic Grind/Brew
Strength Settings
Fineness Settings
Conical Burr Grinder
Drip Stop
Charcoal Water Filter
Gold Tone Filter
Safety Shutoff
9.2" x 9.2" x 15.2"
Cuisinart DGB-650BC Grind-and-Brew Thermal 10-Cup Automatic Coffeemaker
Cuisinart
DGB-650BC Grind-and-Brew Thermal 10-Cup Automatic Coffeemaker
Programmable
Automatic Grind/Brew
2 Blade Grinder
Brew Pause
Double-Wall Carafe
Charcoal Water Filter
Gold Tone Filter
Auto Shutoff
9.8" x 12" x 17.5"
BLACK+DECKER 12-Cup Mill and Brew Coffeemaker CM5000B
BLACK+DECKER
12-Cup Mill and Brew Coffeemaker CM5000B
Programmable
Automatic Grind/Brew
Strength Settings
2 Blade Grinder
Brew Pause
Bronze Tone Filter
Auto Shutoff
10" x 13.5" x 15.5"
Cuisinart DGB-900BC Grind & Brew Thermal 12-Cup Automatic Coffeemaker
Cuisinart
DGB-900BC Grind & Brew Thermal 12-Cup Automatic Coffeemaker
Programmable
Automatic Grind/Brew
Strength Settings
Burr Grinder
Brew Pause
Double-Wall Carafe
Charcoal Water Filter
Gold Tone Filter
Auto Shutoff
7.9" x 12.7" x 15.9"

 

Best Coffee Maker with Grinder

 

Capresso 464.05 CoffeeTeam GS 10-Cup Digital Coffeemaker with Concial Burr Grinder

Capresso 464.05 CoffeeTeam GS 10-Cup Digital Coffeemaker with Concial Burr Grinder

Our first pick for best coffee maker with grinder will brew up to 10 cups of coffee at a time.  And, it will grind enough beans for up to 20 cups of coffee before you will need to refill the 6 ounce bean bin.

The Capresso CoffeeTeam GS Digital Coffeemaker with Concial Burr Grinder is programmable so you can wake up smelling the day ahead of you.  With the programmable settings, you can choose between 2 to 10 cups of coffee at a mild, regular or strong setting.  In addition, this coffee maker offers 5 fineness settings to grind the beans according to the darkness or the lightness of the bean.  So, for darker beans, you can program the grinder for a coarser grind.  And, with a lighter bean, you can program the grinder for a finer grind.

Furthermore, these settings are all programmable by a 24-hour clock.  This clock is displayed on an LCD screen which also displays the grind and strength settings.

So, what if you don’t want to use the programmable settings?  No worries, this coffee maker will also work manually.

Now, what happens if you’re up and ready to go before the coffee gets done brewing?  Well, this coffee maker with grinder has a drip stop so you can pour your coffee in the middle of the process without worrying about making a mess.  Then, just place the coffee pot back on the burner and the brewing will resume.

This coffee maker with grinder also features direct-feed technology.  Direct-feed technology is where the grinder feeds the beans right into the filter, so you don’t have to worry about anything except for pouring your morning cup of coffee.     

The Capresso CoffeeTeam GS 10-Cup Digital Coffeemaker features a solid steel concial burr grinder.  According to Kitchn, a conical burr grinder will grind your beans in a uniform size.  And, since this is a slow grinding concial burr grinder, it will increase the aroma of the coffee.  Furthermore, according to Whole Latte Love, the slow grinding conical burr grinder is the “Cadillac” of grinders.  So, coming from the coffee specialists themselves, this is the best grinder money can buy.

The next question is, what if you want to use pre-ground coffee?  This coffee maker will work with or without the grinder, so feel free to grind or not to grind.

And, for a few other notable features, the Capresso CoffeeTeam GS 10-Cup Digital Coffeemaker comes equipped with a charcoal water filter.  This charcoal water filter will remove up to 82% of chlorine, sediment and odor from the water.

Furthermore, this coffee maker with grinder features a 2-hour safety shutoff to preserve energy and to keep your surroundings safe.

Finally, this pick for best coffee maker with grinder comes with your choice of a glass carafe or a stainless steel carafe.

Pros:

The Capresso CoffeeTeam GS Digital Coffeemaker is extremely well made and a quality product.  Furthermore, it has endless features from the charcoal water filter to the 3 strength settings to the 5 fineness settings.  And, it is completely programmable, so you don’t have to worry about a thing when waking up.

Another added bonus with this coffee maker with grinder is it comes with a conical burr grinder.  This grinder is the grinder used by coffee snobs and connoisseurs alike.  So, you’re going to have some of the best smelling and best tasting coffee money can brew.

Cons:

A few consumers have complained about how long this grinder takes to grind.  In addition, they also stated that this grinder is rather loud.  So, if you’re a light sleeper, you may want to venture with another option on our list.

Furthermore, once you have filled the bean bin with whole beans, they are there to stay.  So, if you’re looking to change to a different blend, you need to go through the grinding process in order to rid of the unused beans.  However, this grinder has the capacity for approximately 2 pots of brewed coffee, so it’s not the biggest downfall in the world of brewing coffee.

 

Cuisinart DGB-650BC Grind-and-Brew Thermal 10-Cup Automatic Coffeemaker

Cuisinart DGB-650BC Grind-and-Brew Thermal 10-Cup Automatic Coffeemaker

This pick for best coffee maker with grinder is another one with a 10 cup brew capacity.  And, the grinder bin has the capacity to grind enough beans for a full pot of coffee.

The Cuisinart DGB-650BC Grind-and-Brew Thermal 10-Cup Automatic Coffeemaker is completely programmable.  These programmable settings include a 1-4 cup brewing option, a brew-pause and a grind-off.  The brew-pause function allows you to pour the coffee while it’s brewing.  This will enable the spout to shut off until you place the carafe back on the burner.  Additionally, the grind-off function will allow you to use pre-ground coffee.

Furthermore, these settings can all be programmed 24 hours in advance to ensure you wake up to the smell of coffee.  And, there is a large control panel with an LED display to adjust these settings.

The Cuisinart DGB-650BC Grind-and-Brew Thermal Automatic Coffeemaker features a 2 blade grinder.  According to the Coffee Detective and other coffee professionals, the better option for a grinder is a burr grinder.  With a 2 blade grinder, there is inconsistency with the size of the grind which can clog the machine.  However, the 2 blade grinder is less expensive than a burr grinder.

Furthermore, with this 2 blade grinder, it is preset to brew medium strength coffee.  So, be sure you choose your coffee blends accordingly.  If you prefer dark-brewed coffee, we suggest going with a darker blend.  If you prefer light-brewed coffee, we suggest going with the lightest blend possible.  Or, you can choose any blend you want and just add less beans.

The Cuisinart DBG-650BC Grind-and-Brew Coffeemaker will automatically grind the beans before brewing.  So, while you’re waking up, the grind process will already be in effect for your much-awaited first cup of coffee.

This coffee maker with grinder comes with a double-wall thermal carafe which will keep the coffee hotter for longer.  And, this carafe features a stay-cool handle and a drip-free spout.

Additional features of this coffee maker with grinder include a charcoal water filter and a gold tone filter.  The charcoal water filter will eliminate most contaminants from the water and will remove odor, making way for an even more delicious cup of coffee.

Finally, the Cuisinart Grind-and-Brew is made in such a way that all materials which come in contact with the water, coffee and coffee beans are BPA free.

Pros:

Consumers find this coffee maker with grinder easy to use.  And, furthermore, it is easy to clean.

In addition, the thermal double-wall coffee pot is an industrial-style pot which is great for keeping the coffee hotter for longer.  

Cons:

This coffee maker comes with a 2 blade grinder as opposed to a burr grinder.  A burr grinder is definitely the far better grinder for better tasting coffee.  However, if you are interested in this Cuisinart but prefer a burr grinder, you’re in luck.  Our last pick for best coffeemaker with grinder is a Cuisinart with a burr grinder.

Lastly, this coffeemaker doesn’t have an adjustable grinder.  So, you will need to work around the medium-strength brew preset by following our examples above.

BLACK+DECKER 12-Cup Mill and Brew Coffeemaker CM5000B

BLACK+DECKER 12-Cup Mill and Brew Coffeemaker CM5000B

This pick for best coffeemaker with grinder comes with a 12 cup brew capacity carafe.  And, the grinder bin also allows for a 12 cup brew capacity.  So, you will need to fill the grinder bin with fresh beans before each brew.

The Black & Decker 12-Cup Mill and Brew Coffeemaker CM5000B features 24-hour programming with multiple settings.  These settings include brew strength, grind-off, small-brew, and of course, grinding and brewing at your desired time.  The brew strength setting allows you to set the option for regular, bold or strong coffee.  The grind-off setting allows you to shut off the grinder so you can use ground coffee.  And, the small-brew setting will allow you to make a smaller pot of coffee for those energy-fueled days.

These settings are all programmable on a large control panel with a backlight display.  This backlight display will highlight the settings and the time.

This coffeemaker with grinder comes with a 2 blade grinder.  And, like we stated above, a 2 blade grinder isn’t necessarily the grinder the professionals use.  It will grind and it will allow for great tasting brewed coffee.  However, because of the way it erratically grinds the coffee, it has a tendency to clog after a while.

The Black & Decker 12-Cup Mill and Brew Coffeemaker comes with a couple more notable features.  These features include a permanent bronze filter, a brew-stop function and an automatic-off function.  The brew-stop function will allow you to pour a cup of coffee mid-brew without making a mess.  And, the automatic-off function will shut off the heat to preserve energy and prevent a disaster.

Finally, this coffee maker with grinder comes in your choice of colors:  Black, Black/White, Red or White.

Pros:

For having a 2 blade grinder, this machine grounds the coffee reasonably fine.  Therefore, you may be able to avoid clogging issues for longer with this pick.

Furthermore, the grinder is fairly quiet.  And, if you’re a light sleeper, you’re going to love this aspect.

Cons:

There is no water filter with the Black & Decker 12-Cup Mill and Brew Coffeemaker.  However, to achieve the best tasting coffee, you can fill the water tank up with pre-filtered water.

In addition, there is no reservoir for the beans.  So, you will have to fill this bin each time before programming it to brew at your desired time.

 

Cuisinart DGB-900BC Grind & Brew Thermal 12-Cup Automatic Coffeemaker

Cuisinart DGB-900BC Grind & Brew Thermal 12-Cup Automatic Coffeemaker

Our grand finale for best coffee maker with grinder is a 12 cup capacity coffee maker with an 8 ounce bean bin.  This bean bin will hold a half a pound of beans which will allow you to grind and brew approximately 4 pots of coffee.

The Cuisinart DGB-900BC Grind & Brew Thermal 12-Cup Automatic Coffeemaker is fully programmable.  These programmable settings include automatic grind, automatic brew, automatic shutoff, brew-pause and grind-off.  The automatic shutoff will shut down the coffee maker to preserve energy and keep your surroundings safe.  The brew-pause setting will allow you to pour yourself a cup of coffee mid-brew without making a mess.  And, the grind-off setting will allow you to use pre-ground coffee.

Furthermore, there is a strength setting and a grind control.  With the strength setting, you can set the strength of your coffee to mild, medium or strong.  And, with the grind control, you can grind enough coffee for 2 to 12 cups.  In addition, there is a feature where you’re able to brew between 2 and 4 cups of coffee.

The Cuisinart DGB-900BC Grind & Brew Thermal 12-Cup Automatic Coffeemaker features a burr grinder.  And, like we stated above, a burr grinder is the choice of coffee professionals and coffee connoisseurs alike.  A burr grinder will grind the beans in a uniform size, which helps to prevent clogging.  In addition, a burr grinder produces better tasting and better smelling coffee.  And, we’re pretty sure we can all wake up to that.

This coffee maker with grinder comes with a charcoal water filter.  This charcoal water filter will remove most of the contaminates in the water and will help to eliminate odor.  And, eliminating odor will help to achieve the ultimate fresh brewed coffee.

The Cuisinart Grind & Brew Thermal 12-Cup Automatic Coffeemaker comes with a double-wall insulated stainless steel thermal carafe and features a comfort grip handle.  This double-wall thermal carafe will help to keep the coffee hotter for longer.

Finally, this pick for best coffee maker with grinder is BPA free.

Pros:

This coffee maker is fairly quiet which is great for the light sleepers out there.

In addition, the Cuisinart Grind & Brew 12-Cup Coffeemaker features a burr grinder for better tasting and better smelling coffee.  And, it helps to keep things from getting clogged.

Another aspect consumers love about this coffeemaker is it is very easy to operate.

Cons:

With this pick for best coffee maker with grinder, there is no fineness settings for coarseness.  If you’re looking for a coffeemaker with grinder comparable to this model that has these settings, you may want to check out the first option on our list.

Furthermore, this coffeemaker requires quite a bit of daily cleaning.  However, some consumers say for such great tasting coffee, it’s well worth it.

 

best seat cushion for lower back pain

Best Seat Cushion for Lower Back Pain

Because we suffer from lumbar, coccyx, sciatica and hip issues, we found ourselves in need of the best seat cushion for lower back pain.  And, we also needed a cushion that was going to improve our posture, which in the long run, will help our back and hip issues over time.

So, when we began this assignment, the seat cushion we were using at the time had flattened out like a pancake and we were in desperate need before our back and hip issues became worse.  Therefore, our pancake seat cushion gave us our first requirement for finding the best seat cushion.  The cushion had to hold up through long hours of sitting day in and day out.  So, durability and longevity was one of our main focal points.

Our other main focal point was, of course, finding the best seat cushion to help alleviate our wide range of issues.  Like we stated previously, sciatic nerve pain, anterior pelvic tilt, pelvic floor pain, lower back pain and a fractured coccyx.  Trust us, all of this together is not fun.  And, that’s why finding the best seat cushion for us is all that more dire.

So, with our final picks, we needed relief.  And, we made sure these picks will not only help us with our wide-range of issues, they will help us for months to come.

 

Best Seat Cushion for Lower Back Pain

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Everlasting Comfort 100% Pure Memory Foam Luxury Seat Cushion
Everlasting Comfort
100% Pure Memory Foam Luxury Seat Cushion
Memory Foam
Non-Slip Gel Rubber Bottom
U-Shaped Coccyx Cutout
Leg Support
17.5" x 13.5" x 2.8"
Easy Posture Dr. Tushy Wedge
Easy Posture
Dr. Tushy Wedge
Memory Foam
EZ Snap Elastic Straps
U-Shaped Coccyx Cutout
Leg Support
14" x 14" x 3"
Kieba Coccyx Seat Cushion
Kieba
Coccyx Seat Cushion
Memory Foam
Gel Technology
Non-Slip Bottom
U-Shaped Coccyx Cutout
Leg Support
14" x 18" x 3"
Ergonomic Innovations Donut Tailbone Cushion
Ergonomic Innovations
Donut Tailbone Cushion
Medical Foam
Non-Slip Bottom
Center Coccyx Cutout
17.5" x 14" x 2.5"
Soft & Care Seat Cushion Coccyx Orthopedic Memory Foam and Lumbar Support Pillow
Soft & Care
Seat Cushion Coccyx Orthopedic Memory Foam and Lumbar Support Pillow
Memory Foam
Non-Slip Bottom
U-Shaped Coccyx Cutout
Back Support
Adjustable Straps
18” x 14” x 3”

 

Best Seat Cushion for Lower Back Pain

Everlasting Comfort 100% Pure Memory Foam Luxury Seat Cushion

Everlasting Comfort 100% Pure Memory Foam Luxury Seat Cushion

Our first pick for best seat cushion for lower back pain is made of 100% memory foam.  So, this will mold to your tush and relieve pressure that often comes with sitting on hard surfaces.

The Everlasting Comfort 100% Pure Memory Foam Luxury Seat Cushion is used to relieve numerous back conditions.  These conditions include sciatic nerve pain, arthritis, lower back pain, lumbar pain, coccyx discomfort and hip discomfort.

So, how does a memory foam seat cushion manage to alleviate all of these conditions?  Like we mentioned previously, the memory foam will help relieve pressure by absorbing shock.  Furthermore, this seat cushion features a contoured design to support your legs.  And, it has a U-shaped cutout to take much-needed pressure off of the coccyx.

The Everlasting Comfort Luxury Seat Cushion is heat responsive, which not only helps to form perfectly to your tush, it will also help to relax tight muscles.

Finally, this seat cushion offers a nonslip gel rubber bottom to keep you secure and in proper alignment at all times.

And, there is a weight limit with this cushion.  So, for maximum benefit and longevity of this seat cushion, it is best suited for those weighing between 100 and 300 pounds. 

What consumers are saying:

Consumers say this seat cushion is firm, yet comfortable.  In addition, it keeps its form without flattening out over time.

In addition, consumers say it helps them sit upright and prevents them from hunching over.

And, as far as alleviating back and hip conditions, the consensus was overwhelming.  Many consumers who suffer from pain and discomfort related to sciatica and hip, lumbar and coccyx issues reported feeling relief from these particular issues and were able to sit comfortably for longer periods of time.

Easy Posture Dr. Tushy Wedge

Easy Posture Dr. Tushy Wedge

This next pick for best seat cushion for lower back pain is made with memory foam and features a soft velour cover.  And, like we mentioned previously, memory foam will help absorb shock and relieve back, hip and coccyx pressure.

The Easy Posture Dr. Tushy Wedge is designed in such a way that it will help to improve posture while alleviating pain associated with hip, lower back and coccyx issues.  And, for those with hip pain, or in our case, anterior pelvic tilt, this cushion will help align your hips to relieve pain that comes with sitting for long periods of time.

This seat cushion features a coccyx cut out to help take complete pressure off of the tailbone.  So, for those that have had a tailbone injury, you can breathe a sigh of relief.

The Easy Posture Dr. Tushy Wedge comes with EZ Snap elastic straps to secure the cushion into place.  And, this is especially helpful while using this seat cushion in the car.

Finally, this seat cushion’s cover is removable and machine washable.

What consumers are saying:

Consumers say this seat cushion is firm, yet gives a little once it detects the form of the body.  And, once it conforms to the body, it is extremely comfortable.

Furthermore, consumers say this seat cushion helps relieve pressure from the hips and works very well in aligning the spine while relieving lumbar and coccyx pain.

Lastly, most consumers agree, the Easy Posture Dr. Tushy Wedge keeps its shape after months of use.

Kieba Coccyx Seat Cushion

Kieba Coccyx Seat Cushion

This pick for best seat cushion for lower back pain is made of premium memory foam.  Furthermore, this memory foam is layered with gel technology to keep things cool.

The Kieba Coccyx Seat Cushion is designed for lumbar, coccyx, hip and sciatic pain and discomfort.  Some other conditions this seat cushion will help comfort is pelvic pain, herniated discs and bed sores.

In addition, this seat cushion will help align the spine and promote correct posture.  And, because this seat cushion offers leg support, it will distribute weight evenly.

The Kieba Coccyx Seat Cushion comes with a non-slip bottom to keep you secure through hours of sitting.  Furthermore, this seat cushion features a removable velour cover that is machine washable.

What consumers are saying:

Consumers say this seat cushion is firm, yet comfortable.  And, some consumers say it is too firm.  So, if you are looking for a firm seat cushion, this is a great pick for you.  If you like to have a little cushion, you may want to go with another one of our picks.

Furthermore, this seat cushion is wider in size than our other picks.  So, if you need more space for your hips, this is one to consider.

Ergonomic Innovations Donut Tailbone Cushion

Ergonomic Innovations Donut Tailbone Cushion

For those of you that have tried the U-shaped seat cushions to no avail, this donut-shaped cushion may be the miracle you’ve been looking for.

The Ergonomic Innovations Donut Tailbone Cushion is made of high-rebound medical foam.  And, high-rebound medical foam is durable and long-lasting, while being firm, yet comfortable.

This seat cushion can be helpful for numerous conditions.  Some of these conditions include:  lumbar, hip and pelvic pain, coccyx discomfort, hemorrhoids, ulcers, herniated disc, prostate pain and more.  Furthermore, if you suffer from prolonged sitting disorder, this seat cushion will also give you relief.

The Ergonomic Innovations Donut Tailbone Cushion features a center cutout for the coccyx.  In addition, this cutout will relieve pressure to the spine.

Lastly, this donut seat cushion has a nonslip bottom that will help keep you seated securely.  And, it has a removable cover that is machine washable.

What consumers are saying:

Consumers say this seat cushion is very firm.  So, if firm support is what you’re looking for, this is a great pick for you.

Additionally, consumers say this is a quality product and it retains its shape well.

Soft & Care Seat Cushion Coccyx Orthopedic Memory Foam and Lumbar Support Pillow

Soft & Care Seat Cushion Coccyx Orthopedic Memory Foam and Lumbar Support Pillow

Our last pick for best seat cushion for lower back pain is for those who need extra back support.  Furthermore, this pick is especially great for those who have a less than desirable office chair.

The Soft & Care Seat Cushion Coccyx Orthopedic Memory Foam and Lumbar Support Pillow is made of high-density, premium memory foam.  And, like we mentioned earlier, memory foam will absorb shock and take some of the pressure off of the spine, hip and coccyx area.

This seat cushion is great for numerous issues, such as, sciatica, herniated disc, hip pain, pelvic floor pain, lower lumbar pain, pregnancy discomfort and more.  And, because this seat cushion has a coccyx cutout, this will give additional relief for the coccyx and spine area.  Additionally, this seat cushion will help align the spine and promote correct posture.

The Soft & Care Seat Cushion Coccyx Orthopedic Memory Foam Pillow comes with a non-slip bottom to keep you extra secure, while the top cushion features 2 adjustable straps that buckle to keep the cushion in place.  Furthermore, for traveling purposes, this seat cushion comes with a convenient carrying handle and a side pocket for your phone.

Lastly, this seat cushion features breathable mesh to keep things cool and comfortable.  And, the cover is removable and washable.

What consumers are saying:

If you’re looking for softer support, this is a great option for you.  However, users seem to agree, although soft, it’s supportive.  And, more specifically, it offers great lumbar and spine support.

In addition, consumers say the Soft & Care Seat Cushion Memory Foam Support Pillow is quality constructed and durable.  But, consumers say it’s a bit on the small size, especially the seat back.  So, if you’re on the smaller side, this may be a good option for you.  If you’re in need of something bigger, you may want to check out some of our other picks.

 

best space heater for large room

Best Space Heater for Large Room

When looking for the best space heater for large room, it is crucial to find a heater that is efficient.  If you have ever received an electricity bill after trying to keep warm in the winter, it’s not the most pleasant surprise.  So, when we began our search for the best space heater for large room, efficiency was at the top of our list.

Another quality to look for when searching for the best space heater for large room is safety.  Therefore, our final picks all have different safety features to help prevent a disaster.  For instance, one of our picks has tip-over protection while another pick stays cool to the touch.  And, of course, all of our picks come with overheat protection.

In addition, we also had comfort in mind when choosing our final 5 best heaters for a large space.  And, we are not talking about the comfort of heat.  This aspect we already made sure of.  We are talking quiet heat.  So, if the heat is blowing, there will be very little to no white noise.

Finally, we sifted through all the user reviews and made sure each on of our final picks lived up to the expectations of some picky consumers.  And, our final picks have some of the highest-rated reviews and most satisfied consumers on the market.

 

Best Space Heater for Large Room

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Dr Infrared Heater Portable Space Heater
Dr Infrared Heater
Portable Space Heater
PTC/Quartz Infrared Heating
1500 Watt/12.5 Amp
Electronic Thermostat
12 Hour Automatic Shutoff
Tip-Over Protection
Remote Control
13" x 11" x 16"
Duraflame DFI-5010-01 Infrared Quartz Fireplace Stove with 3D Flame Effect
Duraflame
DFI-5010-01 Infrared Quartz Fireplace Stove with 3D Flame Effect
Quartz Infrared Heating
1500 Watt/12.5 Amp
Thermostat
Metal Construction
3-D Flame Effect
Cool Touch
Safer Plug Fire Prevention
Remote Control
Style Options
13.1" x 24" x 23.4"
Homegear Pro 1500w Large Room Infrared Space Cabinet Heater
Homegear
Pro 1500w Large Room Infrared Space Cabinet Heater
Mica/Quartz Infrared Heating
1500 Watts/12.5 Amp
Thermostat
Cool Touch
Overheat Protection
Remote Control
Style Options
12" x 13" x 17"
Cadet RCP402S Space Heater "The Hot One"
Cadet
RCP402S Space Heater "The Hot One"
4000 Watts/20 Amp
Double Pole Thermostat
Fan Only Mode
Mounting Bracket
Overheat Protection
Color Options
Wattage Options
8.2" x 17.5" x 15.8"
Heat Storm Portable 1500 Watt Infrared Heater
Heat Storm
Portable 1500 Watt Infrared Heater
HMS Technology Heating
1500 Watt/12.5 Amp
Thermostat
Fan
Overheat Sensor
Remote Control
12.5" x 14.5" x 16"

 

Best Space Heater for Large Room

 

Dr Infrared Heater Portable Space Heater

Dr Infrared Heater Portable Space Heater

Our first pick for best space heater for large room is energy-efficient and will keep a 1,000 square foot space comfortably warm.

And, how does it do this?  The Dr Infrared Portable Space Heater uses a high-efficiency blower to transfer heat.  This blower is twice as large and will move larger volumes of air than other competing space heaters.  In addition, this blower is virtually noiseless.  

Furthermore, the Dr Infrared Portable Space Heater uses a dual heating system.  This dual heating system combines both PTC and Quartz Infrared Heating.  PTC heating, or Positive Temperature Coefficient, helps to prevent overheating and reduce operating costs.  And, Quartz Infrared Heating heats up instantly and operates quietly.

This 1500 Watt, 12.5 Amp portable space heater features an electronic thermostat, which is also operational via remote, and has a heating range of 50 to 86 degrees.  In addition, this space heater offers a high and low feature to customize the amount of heat output.

And, for safety protection, the Dr Infrared Portable Space heater comes with a 12 hour automatic shutoff and tip-over protection.

Pros:

The consensus with this space heater is it heats up quickly and operates quietly.

Additionally, it is able to heat a large space and accommodate tall ceilings.

Cons:

The remote control only works if the heater is turned on.  And, some consumers have issues with the remote interfering with their other electronics.  And, perhaps, this may be a case where the remote uses the same frequency as other appliances.

 

Duraflame DFI-5010-01 Infrared Quartz Fireplace Stove with 3D Flame Effect

Duraflame DFI-5010-01 Infrared Quartz Fireplace Stove with 3D Flame Effect

This next pick for best space heater for large room can heat up an area as large as 1,000 feet.  The Duraflame DFI-5010-01 Quartz Fireplace Stove uses Quartz infrared heating which will heat up instantly.  Furthermore, Quartz infrared heating will preserve the natural humidity in the air.

This 1500 Watt, 12.5 Amp space heater is constructed of metal and offers side windows and a beveled glass door.  And, there is access through the door for easy maintenance.

The Duraflame Quartz Fireplace Stove features an adjustable thermostat which can be turned up to a maximum of 82 degrees Fahrenheit.  Additionally, this thermostat is operable via remote control.

And, when you’re not using the heat, the flame effect can be turned on to set the mood.  Furthermore, this flame effect has 5 adjustable brightness and speed settings.

For safety purposes, the Duraflame Quartz Fireplace Stove is cool to the touch which is a necessity for households with children and pets.  

For overheat protection, this space heater features Safer Plug Fire Prevention Technology.  Safer Plug Fire Prevention Technology will automatically shutoff the stove if the temperature rises above the maximum safety level.

Finally, this space heater comes in your choice of 4 styles:  Black, Black Carleton, Bronze Steel or Pure Black.

Pros:

The Duraflame Quartz Fireplace Stove not only adds heat, but ambience as well.  And, the adjustable brightness and speed settings for the flame effects are a great addition.

Furthermore, because this unit uses Quartz heating, it will keep the air comfortably moist without drying it out.

Cons:

The remote control will only turn the heat on and off.  So, if you want to adjust the temperature, you’re going to have to do that in the unit.  And, when we mean in the unit, we mean in the unit.  You will have to open the door in order to set the temperature.

 

Homegear Pro 1500w Large Room Infrared Space Cabinet Heater

Homegear Pro 1500w Large Room Infrared Space Cabinet Heater

If you’re looking to heat up an even larger space, this pick for best space heater for large room will accommodate an area of 1500 square feet.

The Homegear Pro 1500w Large Room Infrared Space Cabinet Heater uses Mica and Quartz Infrared Heating.  Like we stated earlier, Quartz heating will work instantaneously and keep the desired level of moisture in the air.  And, when it comes to Mica heating, or micathermic heating, this type of heating is good for transferring heat and will heat the air while radiating infrared heat waves.

This 1500 Watt space heater features a thermostat which can be set from 59 degrees to 86 degrees Fahrenheit.  In addition, the fan can be set to economy, low or high.

And, you can control all of this via the unit or the remote control.  Furthermore, this unit features an LED display to observe the current temperature.

The Homegear Pro Large Room Infrared Space Cabinet Heater comes with overheat protection.  If things get too hot, the unit will automatically turn off to avoid overheating.  In addition, this space heater will stay cool to the touch which is a necessity for households with kids and pets.

Lastly, this space heater comes in your choice of colors and color combinations:  Black, Brown and Black/White.

Pros:

If you’re looking to heat up a very large space, this is a great option for you to consider.  And, most consumers seem to agree, this space heater works extraordinarily well.

Furthermore, for peace of mind, this space heater operates quietly.

Cons:

Some consumers say it’s an exaggeration that this space heater can heat an area of 1500 square feet.  However, this is all determined by ceiling height, window draft and insulation.  So, if you have lower ceilings, tight-fitting windows and have good insulation, you shouldn’t have an issue.

 

Cadet RCP402S Space Heater "The Hot One"

Cadet RCP402S Space Heater “The Hot One”

If you’re looking for a garage heater or a super-strength indoor heater, this is a great option to check out.  The Cadet RCP402S Space Heater “The Hot One” will efficiently heat a space of 400 to 600 square feet at a range of 45 to 80 degrees Fahrenheit.

This 4000 Watt, 20 Amp space heater features a built-in double pole thermostat.  According to Cadet, a double pole thermostat contains a safety feature that single pole thermostats do not.  When a double pole thermostat is turned off, it will not turn back on once the temperature dips.

The Cadet “The Hot One” has low and high settings for heat output.  It also has the option of a fan without heat.  So, if you’re interested in a fan and a space heater, this is an excellent choice.

Furthermore, this space heater comes with a 6 foot cord and a bracket for standing or an optional wall or ceiling mount.

The Cadet “The Hot One” features a high-temperature safety shutoff.  Additionally, it is recommended that there is at least 3 feet of clearance from the front of the heater, a 6 inch clearance from the back and the top of the heater and a 12 inch clearance from both sides.

Finally, this space heater comes in your choice of Camo or Red.  And, it also comes in your choice of 4000 Watt or 5000 Watt.

Pros:

Consumers rave about how quickly and efficiently this space heater heats up.

Additionally, this is a high quality product with consumers stating that it has lasted them decades.

Cons:

This space heater can be a little loud.  However, most consumers agree that it is not an annoying loud.

 

Heat Storm Portable 1500 Watt Infrared Heater

Heat Storm Portable 1500 Watt Infrared Heater

Our final pick for best space heater for large room is efficient enough to heat an area of up to 1,000 square feet.

The Heat Storm Portable 1500 Watt Infrared Heater uses HMS Technology which combines with the humidity in the room to produce heat, while keeping the moisture in the air.  And, according to Heat Storm, HMS Technology will provide faster heating while running more efficiently, which will save on heating costs.

In addition, for more efficiency, this 1500 Watt space heater has an Energy Efficient Mode which will reduce the wattage from 1500 to 750 Watts.

The Heat Storm Portable Infrared Heater has an LED display which displays the ambient temperature.  And, an adjustable thermostat with a maximum temperature setting of 99 degrees Fahrenheit.  Furthermore, this can all be controlled with a remote control.

Lastly, for safety purposed, this space heater comes with an overheat sensor which will sense when things get too hot.  Once things get too hot, this space heater will automatically shut down.

Pros:

Consumers state that this space heater can heat up a space in no time.

Furthermore, it’s efficient, quiet and look great.

Cons:

While many consumers say the Heat Storm Portable Infrared Heater is quiet, others say the fan is a little noisy.  And, more specifically, that it sounds like white noise.

 

best leather recliner

Best Leather Recliner Chair Reviews

The first order of business when searching for the best leather recliner is comfort.  And, along with comfort comes support.  The best leather recliner should be comfortable, yet offer a soft, yet stabilized platform to promote good posture.  

The next thing to look for with the best leather recliner is durability.  Because these chairs have hinges, joints and handles, it is imperative to have these functioning.  And, not only functioning, but functioning for years.  So, durability equals longevity and both of these together equal extended comfort.

So, after we narrowed down the top leather recliners on the market based on these factors, we further filtered them by style.  And, because everyone has a different aesthetic, we have an array of leather recliners that will work for just about every space.  And, in the end, we chose classic leather and modern recliners.  However, the good news about both of these styles is they will work with just about any decor.  You can mix classic with modern and modern with classic.  So, whatever leather recliner you choose to go with, it’s pretty much a guarantee that it’s going to look like you’re lounging in a magazine.

Finally, our final 5 best leather recliners all have rave reviews from consumers.  And, this is important when purchasing a leather recliner because it also gages the longevity and the durability of the recliner.

 

Best Leather Recliner

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Barcalounger Pedestal Cinna Ped Recliner
Barcalounger
Pedestal Cinna Ped Recliner
Leather
Foam and Down Feather Fill
Mortise and Tenon Joints
Ottoman
Cup Holder
Table Receptacle
Ottoman Storage
35.5" x 35.5" x 43"
Lane Stallion Leather Comfort King Wallsaver Recliner
Lane
Stallion Leather Comfort King Wallsaver Recliner
Leather
Vinyl
Steel Frame
40" x 44" x 48"
RECLINER GENIUS 100% Grain Italian Leather Recliner Lounge Chair with Ottoman
RECLINER GENIUS
100% Grain Italian Leather Recliner Lounge Chair with Ottoman
Leather
Wood
Wood Veneer
Aluminum Base
Ottoman
Color Options
87" x 87" x 82"
Flash Furniture Contemporary Brown Vintage Leather Recliner and Ottoman
Flash Furniture
Contemporary Brown Vintage Leather Recliner and Ottoman
LeatherSoft
Wood
Metal
Ottoman
360 Degree Swivel
Color Options
40" x 32.8" x 41"
Emorden Furniture Leather Lounge Chair & Ottoman
Emorden Furniture
Leather Lounge Chair & Ottoman
Leather
Aluminum Base
Laminated Veneer
Ottoman
360 Degree Swivel
Color Options
35.4" x 35" x 31.5"

 

Best Leather Recliner

 

Barcalounger Pedestal Cinna Ped Recliner

Barcalounger Pedestal Cinna Ped Recliner

Our first pick for best leather recliner is a traditional style recliner that has some aspects of mid century modern design.  And, since it contains the best of both worlds, this will look fabulous with any decor.

The Barcalounger Pedestal Cinna Ped Recliner is constructed with a hardwood and plywood frame and features mortise and tenon joints.  And, according to Popular Mechanics, mortise and tenon joints is considered one of the strongest woodworking joints.  These joints connect by attaching 2 pieces of wood at a 90 degree angle and glued to secure.

This leather recliner comes with 30 individual pocket coils in each seat cushion which is enclosed in high resilience foam.  And, perhaps the best part, this foam is topped with down feathers for the ultimate comfort.  In addition, this recliner features a sculpted foam back and a relaxing headrest.

The Barcalounger has additional features which makes this chair one of our favorite leather recliners on the market.  It has sliding arms which move backwards to reveal a cup holder and a receptacle for a table.  Furthermore, there is storage inside the ottoman which is perfect for books, magazines and remotes.

And, of course, let’s not forget about the leather.  The Barcalounger Cinna Ped Recliner comes with durable, yet soft, high-quality leather.  And, this particular recliner comes in a roasted chestnut color which can easily coordinated with just about any room in the house.

Lastly, this leather recliner comes from a company with quite a history and reputation.  Barcalounger has been around since the 1940’s and has consistently produced quality and luxury.

Pros:

For a high quality leather recliner, this price can’t be beat.  In addition, this recliner is extremely comfortable and the down feathers only add to the comfort.

And, because it is constructed with mortise and tenon joints, this recliner is extremely durable and will most likely last a lifetime.

Cons:

There isn’t many cons to this recliner.  It’s an amazing price for the amount of quality you get.  However, the one downfall is, it is so comfortable, you may never get anything done.

 

Lane Stallion Leather Comfort King Wallsaver Recliner

Lane Stallion Leather Comfort King Wallsaver Recliner

This next pick for best leather recliner has a traditional vintage design, so it can work with both classic and modern decor.  Furthermore, this is a leather recliner which is designed to support up to 500 pounds and it features a high seat back.  And, with both of these aspect combined, this recliner is a perfect fit for those who are big and tall.  Additionally, if you’re someone that likes to get lost while they’re lounging, this recliner will also be a good fit for you.

The Lane Stallion Leather Comfort King Wallsaver Recliner is constructed with a heavy-duty steel frame and filled with a polyurethane foam.  This foam has a density of 2.2 with 30 pounds of compression.  And, with these measurements, this will provide resilient support and pressure relief.

And, perhaps one of the best features of this leather recliner is it will extend to 79 inches when reclined, which is almost equivalent to a king-sized mattress.

Finally, the Lane Stallion Leather Comfort King Wallsaver Recliner features top grain leather with vinyl on the sides and on the back.  And, this vinyl will help prevent wear and tear and is easy to clean.

Pros:

If you’re really looking to sink into a recliner, this is probably your best option.  However, although sinking isn’t necessarily a term used for adequate back support, it is important to note that this recliner does offer a supportive base.  So, it’s the best of both worlds.

Furthermore, if you’re looking for a size solution, this leather recliner will hold a lot of weight and accommodate tall consumers.

Cons:

Some consumers state that the lumbar area could have more padding.

In addition, some consumers feel the chair is stiff which makes it difficult to recline.  And, the handle mechanism in relation to the chair is hard to reach, making it difficult to recline when in a seated position.

 

RECLINER GENIUS 100% Grain Italian Leather Recliner Lounge Chair with Ottoman

RECLINER GENIUS 100% Grain Italian Leather Recliner Lounge Chair with Ottoman

This leather recliner has a style reminiscent of the famous Herman Eames lounge chair at a fraction of the cost.  And, since this is a classic and iconic design, this recliner will work well with every type of decor.

The RECLINER GENIUS 100% Grain Italian Leather Recliner Lounge Chair with Ottoman is constructed with a wood veneer frame with a powder-coated, die-cast aluminum base.  And, it is covered with soft Italian leather upholstery.

This pick for best leather recliner offers ample back and neck support.  In addition, for extra comfort, it swivels and comes with an ottoman foot rest.

Lastly, this leather recliner comes in your choice of 3 colors.  Choose between Walnut Black, Brown or White.

Pros:

The RECLINER GENIUS Leather Recliner Lounge Chair is extremely comfortable and offers fabulous lumbar and neck support.

Furthermore, it is completely covered in Italian leather.  And, it doesn’t get much better than that.

Cons:

This leather chair reclines with body weight.  So, if you’re looking for a recliner that uses a lever, you may want to go with another option.

 

Flash Furniture Contemporary Brown Vintage Leather Recliner and Ottoman

Flash Furniture Contemporary Brown Vintage Leather Recliner and Ottoman

This pick for best leather recliner is a vintage-style recliner which will work well with both traditional and modern decor.

The Flash Furniture Contemporary Brown Vintage Leather Recliner and Ottoman is constructed with a wood and metal base and is covered in LeatherSoft upholstery.  LeatherSoft is a high-quality bonded type of leather made of leather and polyurethane.  And, it is softer and more comfortable than your typical bonded leather.  Furthermore, it keeps things cool and is resistant to fading and flaking.

This leather recliner features a mahogany wood base with 360 degree, ball-bearing swivel action.  In addition, for added comfort, this recliner comes with an integrated headrest and plush LeatherSoft upholstered arms.  To recline, simply adjust the side lever and use your weight to obtain your desired positioned.

Finally, this chair comes in your choice of Brown and Vintage Brown.

Pros:

The overall consensus of the Flash Furniture Contemporary Leather Recliner and Ottoman is it is a comfortable chair for the price.

Furthermore, it is easy to assemble and should take no more than 15 minutes to get setup and ready to lounge.

Cons:

There is no added lumbar support, however, most consumers feel there is enough support regardless.

And, the weight capacity of this chair is 250 pounds.  So, it may not work for everyone.

 

Emorden Furniture Leather Lounge Chair & Ottoman

Emorden Furniture Leather Lounge Chair & Ottoman

This last pick for best leather recliner is another replica of the famous Herman Eames chair.  However, although this is a replica, it is a high quality and well constructed chair.  And, since this is an iconic and classic style of chair, it will go with any decor.

The Emorden Furniture Leather Lounge Chair & Ottoman is constructed with 100% vintage leather which includes all the piping and all the buttons.  It is filled with high-elastic soft foam which offers the ultimate in comfort and in resilience.  Furthermore, it features a 7-ply laminated veneer which lines the bottom and the back of the chair, as well as the ottoman.  This laminated veneer will help to prevent warping and cracking.

This leather recliner has an aluminum base with a 360 degree swivel, while the manual tilt offers a 15 degree recline.  And, the head and back rest features rubber shock mounts for increased flexibility.

The Emorden Furniture Leather Lounge Chair & Ottoman is easy to clean.  It is recommended to use a soft-bristled vacuum and clean with leather-approved oil.  In addition, direct sunlight should be avoided.

Finally, this leather recliner comes in your choice of 4 leather and veneer colors.  Choose between Light Brown Aniline and Palisander Veneer, Red Aniline Leather and Palisander Laminated Veneer, Red Italian Leather and Natural Oak Laminated Veneer or Vintage Leather and Palisander Veneer.

Pros:

The Emorden Furniture Leather Lounge Chair & Ottoman is pretty much an exact replica of the famous Herman Eames chair.  And, if you have ever had the privilege of sitting in one of the chairs, it is one of the most comfortable chairs you will ever witness.

Furthermore, this leather recliner is made with high quality materials so longevity and durability are in your future.

Cons:

For some, a 15 degree angle is just not going to do it.  So, if you are looking to recline in a sleeping type of position, it’s best to go with a different chair.  And, quite possibly, a different design.

 

Best Western Saddle Pad

Best Western Saddle Pad for Comfort

When choosing the best western saddle pad, the first requirement, above all else, should be comfort.  And, this can get tricky because not all horses are created equal.

So, when choosing a saddle pad, you should start with the fit.  Take a good measurement of your horse, pay special attention to the contours of the spine and make sure there’s enough room under the saddle for a pad.  If there’s not enough room under the saddle, you may want to look into purchasing a new saddle.

And, we can’t stress enough how crucial it is to get the proper fit.  Not only will a proper fit help improve the performance of your horse, it will help prevent back issues and soreness that often develops when there’s too much compression on your horse.  A proper fitting pad will also prevent slipping which can cause injury to your horse.

Furthermore, if your horse has a high wither, underdeveloped shoulders or loss of muscle mass due to aging or other factors, you should look into a saddle pad with extra reinforcement and fill to help stabilize the declining area.  And, we have a couple of picks on our list that address these particular issues.

The next aspect to look at when choosing the best western saddle pad is material.  It is best to go with a material that is moisture-wicking and will help to keep the horse from overheating.  Wool is most likely your best option since it naturally helps to keep moisture at bay.  There are also other breathable fabrics and designs that will allow for a consistent airflow and which will work just as well.

Once you have an idea on what fit will work for your horse, you’re ready to go western saddle pad shopping.  And, we found the top 5 best western saddle pads.  These saddle pads are all made with quality materials and have some of the highest ratings on the market.  The only aspects you may find where one works better than the other is size and fit.  And, these saddle pads all have different fits which may be the deciding factor in which western saddle pad you choose.

But, whatever the case may be, these saddle pads have been tried, tested and highly-raved about by riders near and far.

 

Best Western Saddle Pad

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Southwestern Equine Silverado 1" Grey Contoured Saddle Pad
Southwestern Equine
Silverado 1" Grey Contoured Saddle Pad
100% Wool
Leather Trim
Contoured
32" x 32"
Weaver Leather All Purpose Contoured Saddle Pad
Weaver Leather
All Purpose Contoured Saddle Pad
Herculon Fabric
Leather Trim
Tacky-Tack Non-Slip Bottom
Contoured
Color Options
32" x 32"
Classic Equine BioFit Correction Saddle Pad
Classic Equine
BioFit Correction Saddle Pad
Wool Blend
Leather Trim
High-Withered Design
Contoured
30" x 30"
31" x 32"
Thinline Western Endurance Saddle Pad
Thinline
Western Endurance Saddle Pad
Cotton Quilted
Felt Center
Contoured
27" x 23"
Diamond Wool Contour Felt Ranch Pad
Diamond Wool
Contour Felt Ranch Pad
Wool Felt
Leather Trim
Spine Reinforcement
Contoured
32" x 32"

 

Best Western Saddle Pad

Southwestern Equine Silverado 1" Grey Contoured Saddle Pad

Southwestern Equine Silverado 1″ Grey Contoured Saddle Pad

This first pick for best western saddle pad measures 32 inches by 32 inches.  And, it is 1 inch thick which makes it one of the thickest saddle pads on our list.  So, make sure you take your measurements to ensure you have plenty of room under the saddle.

The Southwestern Equine Silverado Contoured Saddle Pad is made of 100% wool and leather trim.  And, because this saddle pad is made with wool, it will help to keep your horse cool and dry.  Furthermore, wool will help with shock absorption to keep your horse comfortable.

This saddle pad is designed to fit the contours of the horses spine.  So, if your horse has a more prominent dip in its back, this saddle pad is a great option for you – and your horse, of course.

The Southwestern Equine Silverado Contoured Saddle Pad is easy to clean.  Simply hose it off or rinse it under cold water.  You can also use a wet sponge to eliminate hair and sweat. After you’re done cleaning, hang dry.

Pros:

This western saddle pad is made with high quality materials and is ultra durable.  So, you can expect this saddle pad to last a long time.

Furthermore, because this saddle pad is contoured, it’s going to take a lot of weight and pressure off of your horse.  And, we all know if the horse is happy, so are you.

Lastly, the Southwestern Equine Silverado Contoured Saddle Pad features a large cut out for the withers.  Therefore, this saddle pad can keep just about any size of horse comfortable.

Cons:

Because this western saddle pad is an inch thick, you’re going to need plenty of room under the saddle.  So, depending on your measurements, you may have to find a saddle pad that isn’t as thick or buy a new saddle.

Weaver Leather All Purpose Contoured Saddle Pad

Weaver Leather All Purpose Contoured Saddle Pad

This next pick for best western saddle pad measures 32 inches by 32 inches and features a 1/2 inch felt insert.  So, just make sure there’s a little room underneath the saddle for your horse’s comfort.

The Weaver Leather All Purpose Contoured Saddle Pad is made with Herculon fabric.  Herculon is a synthetic fabric known for its durability and its resistance to mildew.  In addition, this fabric is quick drying which makes it a great material to keep your horse cool and sweat-free.  And, this Herculon fabric features a waffle pattern to provide optimal ventilation.

This saddle pad comes lined with top grain leather and a tacky-tack bottom.  This tacky-tack bottom will help keep the pad secure and prevent it from sliding around – something that can often cause sores on the horse.  Furthermore, this tacky-tack bottom is breathable which will keep your horse from overheating.

The Weaver Leather All Purpose Contoured Saddle Pad is designed to conform to the shape of your horse’s spine.  So, this will help aid in comfort and it will help prevent injuries.

And, because this saddle pad is made with Herculon fabric, it is easy to clean.  You can simply hose it off or run it under warm water.  Or, you can use a water-based cleaner for a deeper clean.

Finally, the Weaver Leather All Purpose Contoured Saddle Pad comes in your choice of colors, color combinations and/or designs.  Choose between Black, Blue Navajo, Red Navajo, Red/Tan, Tan/Brown, Tan/Red Pattern, and Turquoise/Coral.

Pros:

Because this saddle pad has a tacky-tack bottom, this will help prevent saddle roll.

In addition, consumers claim this saddle pad is easier to break in compared to wool and it conforms very well to the shape of the horse.

Cons:

This western saddle pad is made with synthetic and polyester fabric.  And, although it keeps the horse cool and dry, some consumers prefer the natural element of wool.

Classic Equine BioFit Correction Saddle Pad

Classic Equine BioFit Correction Saddle Pad

This pick for best western saddle pad comes in your choice of 2 sizes.  Choose between 31 inches by 32 inches or 30 inches by 30 inches.  In addition, this pad is an inch thick, however, it is another 1/2 inch thicker in the shoulder area.

The Classic Equine BioFit Correction Saddle Pad will work for all horses.  But, it is specifically designed for horses that have a high wither, underdeveloped shoulders or loss of muscle mass.

This saddle pad offers a contoured design, a strategic buildup to support the shoulders and to fill in any gaps and a wool felt center which will help absorb shock.  And, this contoured design will enhance saddle fit and correspond to the shape of your horse’s back.

The Classic Equine BioFit Correction Saddle Pad is made of a wool blend to help you keep your horse cool and dry.  Furthermore, this saddle pad features leather reinforcement trim in the high wear areas.

Pros:

This saddle pad is a God-send for horses with high withers and offers unbelievable support.  So, not only are a lot of owners happy, a lot of horses are, too.

In addition, many consumers rave about how well this saddle pad fits.

Cons:

A couple of consumers have stated this saddle pad didn’t fit their horse very well, however, they are in the vast minority.  So, not every saddle pad is going to be a one-size-fits-all scenario.

Thinline Western Endurance Saddle Pad

Thinline Western Endurance Saddle Pad

This saddle pad measures 27 inches by 23 inches and has a thickness ranging from 3/4 of an inch to 1 inch.  And, as claimed by the company, the Thinline Western Endurance Saddle Pad is the only pad on the market that is endorsed by veterinarians, spinal surgeons and master saddlers.

So, this saddle pad is made for comfort, and specifically for comfort while endurance and trail riding.  In addition, this saddle pad helps absorb an enormous amount of shock and features extra girth protection for your horse’s back.

The Thinline Western Endurance Saddle Pad is designed to fit drop and center-fire rigged saddles.  However, this works for numerous other saddles including Australian saddles, English saddles, Tucker saddles, Western saddles and more.

Lastly, this saddle pad is made of cotton quilt and features a hollow fill with a felt center.  And, all of these together makes this saddle pad breathable which allows your horse to keep cool during those long rides.

Pros:

The Thinline Western Endurance Saddle Pad is extremely comfortable and offers a secure grip to prevent saddle roll.

In addition, this saddle pad is perfect for endurance and trail riding, which often takes a toll on the horse.

Cons:

Many consumers prefer wool for their saddle pads.  However, this is designed in a way that will allow your horse a lot of breathing room.

Diamond Wool Contour Felt Ranch Pad

Diamond Wool Contour Felt Ranch Pad

Our final pick for best western saddle pad measures 32 inches by 32 inches.  And, it has a thickness of 1 inch, which makes this one of the thickest saddle pads on our list.  So, be sure to take measurements to ensure there is enough room underneath your saddle.

The Diamond Wool Contour Felt Ranch Pad is made of wool felt with leather reinforcement.  And, this wool felt will help keep your horse cool, dry and comfortable, while the leather reinforcement will increase the longevity of the pad since it is placed in a high wear area.

This saddle pad features a reinforced leather spine and a wither relief notch to help take the pressure off the shoulders.  Additionally, this cutout will work especially well with horses who have high withers.

Lastly, the Diamond Wool Contour Felt Ranch Pad is easy to clean.  Just spray or rinse off with cool water and let hang to dry.

Pros:

Most consumers state this saddle pad has the right amount of thickness, not too thick and not too thin.

Furthermore, this saddle pad stays in place with few reports of saddle roll.

Also, the Diamond Wool Contour Felt Ranch Pad is made of high quality materials.

Cons:

A few consumers complained that this saddle pad is thin.  However, the majority of consumers lean towards this pad being thick or just right.

 

best bath bombs

Best Bath Bombs – Top 5 Lush Picks

Bath bombs are the bomb.  That may sound cheesy, but it’s the truth.  And, since we are completely hooked on the fizzy nature of bath bombs and have tried nearly every type of bath bomb out there, we decided to share the top 5 best bath bombs we have had the pleasure of bathing with.

What sets these bath bombs apart from the rest is they are all natural and organic.  In addition, these bath bombs contain an array of essential oils that have left our skin feeling the softest it’s ever felt.

Furthermore, because our picks for best bath bombs contain essential oils, they will help to improve our overall being.  And, most of our picks are customized for whatever current state of mind you are in.  For instance, if you need to unwind after a stressful day, there is a bath bomb that will help you do just that.  If you are looking to detox after a special occasion, there is a bath bomb created just for you.  You can also choose a bath bomb to open your airways and improve your breathing or you can choose a bath bomb for all over rejuvenation.

Finally, our final picks for the best bath bombs all come in gift packaging.  So, whether you’re looking to gift yourself or someone else, somebody is in for a nice surprise.

 

Best Bath Bombs

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Beauty By Earth Bath Bomb Relaxing Collection
Beauty By Earth
Bath Bomb Relaxing Collection
Shea Butter
Cocoa Butter
Star Anise
Hazelnut Oil
Essential Oils
Dead Sea Salt
Epsom Salt
Baking Soda
Anise/Vanilla
Hazelnut/Vanilla Absolute
Pure by Rachelle Parker 6 Lush Bath Bombs
Pure by Rachelle Parker
6 Lush Bath Bombs
Baking Soda
Citric Acid
Kaolin Clay
Dead Sea Salt
Shea Butter
Jojoba Oil
Essential Oils
Lavendar/Rose
Clary Sage/Bergamot
Laural Leaf/Eucalyptus
Ylang Ylang/Geranium
Wintergreen/Chamomile
Ginger/Lavender
ArtNaturals Bath Bombs Gift Set
ArtNaturals
Bath Bombs Gift Set
Baking Soda
Kaolin Clay
Dead Sea Salt
Epsom Salt
Sea Clay
Shea Butter
Cocoa Seed Butter, Sunflower Seed Oil
Essential Oils
Vitamin E
Cinnamon
Cinnamon/Vanilla
Beauty by Earth Bath Bombs Gift Set
Beauty by Earth
Bath Bombs Gift Set
Baking Soda
Dead Sea Salt
Epsom Salt
Kaolin Clay
Shea Butter
Cocoa Butter
Sunflower Oil
Essential Oils
Chamomile/Eucalyptus
Rose/Chamomile
Vanilla Absolute
Turmeric
Lavender
HanZa USA Made Vegan Bath Bombs
HanZa
USA Made Vegan Bath Bombs
Baking Soda
Shea Butter
Natural Clays
Coconut Oil
Palm Oil
Essential Oils
Lemon/Caramel
Cedarwood/Sage
Lavendar/Vanilla
Bergamot/Tangerine
Eucalyptus/Peppermint
Palmarosa/Lavender
Aloe/Clove
Rose/Jasmine

 

Best Bath Bombs

Beauty By Earth Bath Bomb Relaxing Collection

Beauty By Earth Bath Bomb Relaxing Collection

Our first pick for best bath bombs is vegan and cruelty-free.  In addition, this company is created by and run by women.  So, you can be sure they know how we feel about our bath time and create this product accordingly.

And, the proof is in the pudding.  This set of best bath bombs comes with 2 scents:  Keep Calm and No Stress Vanhazelnutty.  Keep Calm is scented with anise and vanilla while No Stress Vanhazelnutty is scented with hazelnut and absolute vanilla.

So, these bath bombs will accomplish a number of things.  First, it will help us relax and decompress.  In addition, these bath bombs are detoxifying, so they will help us to achieve clear and radiant skin.  Furthermore, these bath bombs are ultra moisturizing which will help us obtain a natural balance to our skin while keeping it feeling soft and supple.

And, what are the ingredients that help us obtain all these miraculous qualities?  Well, first of all, Beauty By Earth Bath Bomb Relaxing Collection is made with paraben-free, phthalate-free, sulfate-free, chemical dye-free and synthetic-free fragrance.  And, this set of bath bombs include the following ingredients:  Baking Soda, Citric Acid, Epsom Salt, Dead Sea Salt, Kaolin, Sweat Almond Essential Oil, Organic Sunflower Oil, Organic Hazelnut Oil, Vanilla Absolute, Organic Cocoa Butter, Organic Shea Butter, Organic Madder Root Powder, Organic Star Anise and Vitamin E.

With all of that said, this bath bomb set is highly deserving of a lucky recipient.  And, they are all ready to go in gift packaging.  Each bath bomb is individually wrapped which is testimony to how well this company regards their product.

What consumers are saying:

Consumers love how large these bath bombs are and how well they fizz.  In addition, many consumers claim these bath bombs are ultra relaxing, soothing and have a pleasant fragrance.  Also, after everything was said and done, they didn’t leave any residue on the side of the tub.

Pure by Rachelle Parker 6 Lush Bath Bombs

Pure by Rachelle Parker 6 Lush Bath Bombs

This next pick for best bath bombs are what we call mood bombs.  And, there are 6 different mood bombs that are customized for whatever you may be feeling at a particular moment.  These moods include Love, Revive, Detox, Breathe, Repair and Rejoice.

So, if you’re feeling peaceful and at ease, we suggest going with the Love bomb.  If you’re down and out, we suggest going with the Revive bomb.  If you’ve got something to celebrate, the Rejoice bomb is a given.  However, the one thing these 6 bombs all have in common is they will moisturize dry skin, detox and help take the pressure off of sore muscles and joints.  Furthermore, if you have skin issues such as eczema or psoriasis, these bath bombs will help alleviate the dryness that comes with these conditions.

And, with these bath bombs, you will find the following ingredients:  Baking Soda, Citric Acid, Kaolin Clay, Dead Sea Salt, Shea Butter and Jojoba Oil.  Some of the essential oils you will find in these bath bombs from Pure by Rachelle Parker are Ylang Ylang, Jasmine, Lemon, Rosewood, Orange, Bergamot, Laurel Leaf, Peppermint, Ginger, Tea Tree and Eucalyptus.

Finally, these bath bombs have a nice packaging that’s suitable for gift giving, whether it’s for a friend or for yourself.  In addition, each bath bomb is individually wrapped which is a reflection of the quality of the product.

What consumers are saying:

Consumers love the smell and how soft their skin feels after using these bath bombs.  And, consumers with sensitive skin and skin conditions such as eczema claim these bath bombs have healing properties.  However, some consumers say these aren’t the fizziest of bath bombs.

 

ArtNaturals Bath Bombs Gift Set

ArtNaturals Bath Bombs Gift Set

This set of bath bombs are all paraben-free and cruelty-free.  The ArtNaturals Bath Bombs Gift Set contain 100% all natural ingredients.

And, this is another set of best bath bombs which is customized for whatever ever particular mood you are in.  This set contains one of each bath bomb:  Energize, Meditative Zen, Cleansing Wellness, Healing Strength, Detoxing Yoga and Relaxing Cozy Night.

Each of these bath bombs contain Baking Soda, Kaolin Clay, Dead Sea Salt, Epsom Salt, Sea Clay, Shea Butter, Cocoa Seed Butter, Sunflower Seed Oil, Essential Oils, Vitamin E and Cinnamon. Furthermore, each one of these bath bombs contain the fragrance of vanilla.

And, vanilla has numerous benefits to help you relax, detox, fight infections, fight depression and help calm the nervous system.  So, if you have trouble falling asleep at night, vanilla will help to calm your nerves and help you fall fast asleep.

But, what does this set of bath bombs do for you overall?  Well, the ArtNaturals Bath Bombs will help to rid the body of harmful toxins and chemicals, relieve joint and muscle pain, reduce inflammation, relieve stress and anxiety, and moisturize the skin.  Furthermore, this set of bath bombs is great for treating skin conditions such as psoriasis and eczema.

Lastly, this is another gift giving opportunity because it comes in some fabulous wrapping with each bath bomb being individually wrapped.

What consumers are saying:

Consumers rave about how soft these bath bombs make their skin feel.  In addition, they smell great and are extremely relaxing.  And, the vanilla fragrance is therapeutic.

Beauty by Earth Bath Bombs Gift Set

Beauty by Earth Bath Bombs Gift Set

We love how targeted this particular bath bomb gift set is.  You can choose between Just Relax, Joint Relief, Muscle Relief, Get Well Soon, Relaxing Detox and Bedtime Ritual.

The Beauty by Earth Bath Bombs Gift Set is vegan and contains organic oils and butter.  Furthermore, there is no toxic dye, no parabens and these bath bombs are cruelty-free.

Each one of these bath bombs contain the following ingredients:  Baking Soda, Dead Sea Salt, Epsom Salt, Kaolin Clay, Shea Butter, Cocoa Butter, Sunflower Oil and Essential Oils.  Some of these essential oils include Rose, Chamomile, Eucalyptus, Vanilla, Turmeric and Lavender.

So, you can choose whether you’re in the frame of mind to detox, relax or combat muscle and joint pain – but just know that each one of these bath bombs is going to help soften and moisturize the skin while taking the edge off of a stressful day.

Finally, these best bath bombs are large with each bath bomb being a generous 4.2 ounce size.  And, as long as we’re talking about generosity, this set is exquisitely packaged for gift giving.

What consumers are saying:

Consumers say these are great for sensitive skin.  Furthermore, these smell fabulous and amply soften the skin.  And, this is one set of bath bombs that has a huge fan following.  Click on the link to see for yourself.

 

HanZa USA Made Vegan Bath Bombs

HanZa USA Made Vegan Bath Bombs

Our final pick for best bath bombs comes straight from the USA.  And, they are vegan, which means they are 100% cruelty free.

The HanZa USA Made Vegan Bath Bombs come with 8 bombs which, like most of our picks, are catered to whatever particular mood you are in.  Choose between Pink, Relax, Balance, Vitamin C, Clarity, Restore, Heal and Euphoria.

Each one of these bath bombs contain the following ingredients:  Baking Soda, Shea Butter, Natural Clays, Coconut Oil, Palm Oil and Essential Oils.  These ingredients will help clear the skin of blemishes, relieve dry skin and are suitable for sensitive skin.  In addition, these ingredients will help you relax, combat achy muscles and joints and aid in detoxification.

And, some of the essential oils you can find in this set of bath bombs are Cedarwood, Lavender, Vanilla, Bergamot, Jasmine and Rose – just to name a few.

For those of you that want to run the jets, these bath bombs can be used in the jacuzzi.  All you have to do is wrap them in pantyhose and you will experience fizz like you’ve never experienced before.

Finally, these bath bombs are golf ball-sized.  But, don’t let the size fool you.  Just one of these bath bombs will work well in a double-sized bathtub.

What consumers are saying:

Consumers state that the smell is strong, however it’s good strong.  But, if you’re sensitive to strong smells, you may want to consider another pick.  Furthermore, these bath bombs fizz up incredibly well and make the skin oh so soft.

 

best kitchen faucets

Best Kitchen Faucets Reviews 2018

If you’re looking for the best kitchen faucets, we have chosen 5 of the top kitchen faucets on the market.  Each one of these faucets are made with high-quality materials, durable construction and are highly regarded amongst consumers.

So, what you need to do is figure out which of these best kitchen faucets is going to accommodate your sink.  And, here are a few things to consider:

  • How much headroom do you need?  Some sinks are deeper than others.  Therefore, the deeper the sink, the shorter the arc the faucet should have.  On the reverse side, the more shallow the sink, the taller the arc should be.  However, we do have a pick that has a rather tall arc, but because the spout hangs down lower, it can accommodate a deeper sink.  So, use your best judgement when eyeing the height of the arc in regards to the spout, and take that into consideration with the depth of your sink.
  • How many mounting holes does your sink accommodate?  If it accommodates 1 hole, you should look for an all-inclusive faucet.  If it has 3 holes, you should look for a faucet with separate levers or a faucet with a base which will cover the holes.  With our picks for best kitchen faucets, these all come with an optional 3-hole deck plate.  So, if you choose one of the faucets below, you won’t have to worry about the amount of mounting holes you have.  Just as long as you have one.
  • What is the finish of your doorknobs, handles and other accessories?  For design and aesthetic purposes, the faucet should match these accessories.  And, most of our picks have options that will accommodate your desired finish.  Some of these finishes include bronze, stainless steel, chrome and black.

So, by now you should have an idea of what you need to outfit your kitchen sink.  Like we mentioned previously, we have chosen some of the highest quality kitchen faucets on the market.  And, these faucets have a huge fan following of a lot of happy consumers.

 

Best Kitchen Faucets

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Delta Faucet 9113-AR-DST Essa Single Handle Pull-Down Kitchen Faucet
Delta Faucet
9113-AR-DST Essa Single Handle Pull-Down Kitchen Faucet
Metal
High Arc
Spray and Stream
20 Inch Hose Reach
Optional 3-Hole Deck Plate
Finish Options
9.38" x 10.25" x 15.75"
Kraus KPF-2620SS Modern Oletto Single Lever Pull Down Kitchen Faucet
Kraus
KPF-2620SS Modern Oletto Single Lever Pull Down Kitchen Faucet
Metal
High Arc
Spray and Stream
Optional 3-Hole Deck Plate
Finish Options
8.61" x 2" x 15.75"
Kraus KPF-1650SS Modern Nola Single Lever Commercial Style Kitchen Faucet
Kraus
KPF-1650SS Modern Nola Single Lever Commercial Style Kitchen Faucet
Metal
High Arc
Spring-Style Hose
Spray and Stream
Optional 3-Hole Deck Plate
Finish Options
8.84" x 1.8" 26.19"
KOHLER K-596-CP Simplice Single-Hole Pull-Down Kitchen Faucet
KOHLER
K-596-CP Simplice Single-Hole Pull-Down Kitchen Faucet
Metal
High Arc
Spray, Stream and Pause
Optional 3-Hole Deck Plate
Finish Options
9" x 2" x 10.5"
Moen Arbor One-Handle High Arc Pulldown Kitchen Faucet
Moen
Arbor One-Handle High Arc Pulldown Kitchen Faucet
Metal
High Arc
Spray, Stream and Pause
Optional 3-Hole Deck Plate
Finish Options
7.87" x 3.5" x 15.5"

 

Best Kitchen Faucets

 

Delta Faucet 9113-AR-DST Essa Single Handle Pull-Down Kitchen Faucet

Delta Faucet 9113-AR-DST Essa Single Handle Pull-Down Kitchen Faucet

Our first pick for best kitchen faucets comes in 4 different finishes:  Arctic Stainless, Chrome, Matte Black and Venetian Bronze.  And, this faucet is a modern Euro-design which will work well with both classic and modern decor.

The Delta Faucet 9113-AR-DST Essa Single Handle Pull-Down Kitchen Faucet accommodates a 1 or 3-hole installation.  Furthermore, it has a 3/8 inch water supply connection and will need a 1.5 inch clearance from the backsplash.

For the full measurements of this faucet, the height is 15.75 inches, the spout reach is 9.38 inches and the width of the base is 10.25 inches with 8 inches between the mounting holes.  However, if you only have 1 installation hole, you will only need a 1.25″ hole clearance to accommodate the faucet without the base plate.

This kitchen faucet features a high-arc spout which works best with a shallow sink.  And, this spout swivels 360 degrees and offers a 62 inch hose with a 20 inch reach.  Once you’re finished with the hose, it locks into the MagnaTite Docking.  This docking uses a magnet to keep the sprayer stable and in place.

This Delta Essa Pull-Down Kitchen Faucet will last for up to 5 million uses and comes with DIAMOND Seal Technology.  DIAMOND Seal Technology is a patented design which helps further prevent leaks and extends the life of the faucet.

Another notable aspect of this kitchen faucet is it has touch-clean spray holes which allow for the mineral buildup to be removed swiftly and easily.  It’s so easy, all you have to do is wipe it away with a finger.

Pros:

Because this kitchen faucet only needs a 1.5 inch clearance from the backsplash, this is a great option for those who need a tight fit.

Furthermore, this faucet has a strong sprayer.  And, this could be a plus for some people or a negative for others.  Whatever the case may be, it will efficiently clean the dishes.

Lastly, this kitchen faucet is very easy to install.

Cons:

Like we mentioned above, the Delta Essa Pull-Down Kitchen Faucet has a strong sprayer.  And, this could be seen as a negative as strong sprayers tend to get a bit messy.

 

Kraus KPF-2620SS Modern Oletto Single Lever Pull Down Kitchen Faucet

Kraus KPF-2620SS Modern Oletto Single Lever Pull Down Kitchen Faucet

This pick for best kitchen faucets comes in your choice of Chrome or Stainless Steel.  And, it features a modern design that will work well with classic or contemporary decor.

The Kraus KPF-2620SS Modern Oletto Single Lever Pull Down Kitchen Faucet accommodates a hole size of 1-3/8 inches to 1-1/2 inches for installation.  In addition, this kitchen faucet will need a backsplash clearance of 2-1/2 inches.

Furthermore, this kitchen faucet has a height of 15-3/4 inches, a spout reach of 8-11/16 inches and a base width of 2 inches.  So, because it doesn’t have too high of an arc, this kitchen faucet will work well for both deep and shallow sinks.

The Kraus Oletto Pull Down Kitchen Faucet is extremely durable with a 100% metal body.  In addition, it comes with a corrosion and rust-resistant finish.

This kitchen faucet comes with a 360 degree swivel, pull-down sprayer.  And, the Kraus Oletto Kitchen Faucet has a single-lever control which allows you to set the flow and the temperature.  In addition, it also comes with a button on the spout which allows you to easily switch from stream to spray.

Finally, this kitchen faucet features extra protection from drips for the lifetime of the faucet.  And, it comes with an easy-to-clean rubber nozzle to keep the passageways free from buildup.

Pros:

This kitchen faucet provides a strong water stream, so you may not really need to use the sprayer as often.

In addition, this kitchen faucet is extremely well-built and it is constructed of solid metal.

Also, this is one of the easiest faucets to install, with some consumers saying it took them no more than an hour.  So, you may be able to forgo the plumber with this one.

Cons:

This could be a positive or a negative, but the sprayer is only functional when the button is pressed consistently.  Some consumers like this feature and some consumers do not.

 

Kraus KPF-1650SS Modern Nola Single Lever Commercial Style Kitchen Faucet

Kraus KPF-1650SS Modern Nola Single Lever Commercial Style Kitchen Faucet

The Kraus KPF-1560SS Modern Nola Single Lever Commercial Style Kitchen Faucet comes in your choice of Chrome or Stainless Steel finish.  And, because it is designed as a commercial-style faucet, it will work with every style and every decor.

This pick for best kitchen faucets accommodates a hole size of 1-3/8 inches.  And, it will need a backsplash clearance of approximately 2-1/2 inches.

Furthermore, this kitchen faucet has a height of 26-3/16 inches, a spout reach of 8-27/32 inches and a base width of 1-1/8 inches.  And, once you have all your measurements, you can determine if this kitchen faucet will work with what you’ve got.

This kitchen faucet is tall with a high arc which is usually best paired with a shallow sink.  However, because the spout sits down lower, this will work just as well with a deeper sink.

The Kraus Nola Commercial Style Kitchen Faucet is made of lead-free 100% metal.  In addition, it features a corrosion and rust-resistant finish.

The Kraus Nola Kitchen Faucet comes equipped with a 360 degree swivel spout.  This spout comes attached to a spring-style hose which conveniently pulls down and rests in a magnetic dock.

In order to operate this sink, the stream function on this kitchen faucet works via lever.  And, you can switch to the spray and back to the stream via button on the spout.

Finally, the Kraus Nola Kitchen Faucet features a Kerox ceramic cartridge which will help prevent dripping for the lifetime of the faucet.  In addition, the spout has a rubber nozzle which prevents mineral buildup.

Pros:

We love the industrial design of this kitchen faucet and it will look amazing with every type of decor.

Furthermore, the spring-style hose makes for easy access and easy reach for all the nooks and crannies in the sink.

And, this kitchen faucet is extremely easy to install.

Cons:

Some consumers have complained about low water pressure.  However, the majority of consumers state they have great water pressure.  Sometimes there’s just some bad apples in the bunch.

 

KOHLER K-596-CP Simplice Single-Hole Pull-Down Kitchen Faucet

KOHLER K-596-CP Simplice Single-Hole Pull-Down Kitchen Faucet

This pick for best kitchen faucets comes in your choice of finishes:  Matte Black, Polished Chrome or Vibrant Stainless.  And, since this kitchen faucet is a sleek, elegant and simple design, it will go well with either classic or contemporary surroundings.

The Kohler K-596-CP Simplice Single-Hole Pull-Down Kitchen Faucet accommodates a mounting hole size of 2 inches and will need a backsplash clearance of 2-1/2 inches.

In addition, this kitchen faucet has a height of 10-1/2 inches, a spout reach of 9 inches and a base width of 2 inches.  And, this is a high arc kitchen faucet.  However, because the arc is only 10-1/2 inches tall, this can accommodate both deep and shallow sinks.

The Kohler Simplice Pull-Down Kitchen Faucet is made of premium metal construction.  In addition, it comes with a corrosion and tarnish-resistant finish.

This kitchen faucet comes equipped with a 3-in-1 pull-down spout.  This 360 degree spout allows for touch control to navigate from stream to sweep and to pause.  Furthermore, you can also control the stream and the temperature via the single-handle lever.

The Kohler Simplice Pull-Down Kitchen Faucet features an angled nozzle which allows you to sweep spray.  The sweep spray function will make it easy to reach all corners of the sink and all angles of the dishes.  In addition, this kitchen faucet comes with a magnetic docking which will allow for secure storage for the spout after use.  And, after use, the faucet will remember the temperature used prior.  So, the next time you start up the faucet, you’re all set for your desired temperature.

Pros:

Kohler has been around since 1873 and produces some of the highest quality plumbing products on the market.  So, when you’re purchasing a Kohler product, you can ensure it’s going to be durable and will last you for years to come.

Furthermore, one of the features we love about this kitchen faucet is the sweep spray.  Sometimes with a pull down faucet, it can be tough to hit all the corners of the sink without doing some finagling.  This feature makes it extremely easy.

And, this kitchen faucet is a piece of cake to install, with some consumers stating it took no more than 15 minutes.

Cons:

Although the pause function is a nice touch, it can get a little confusing when you’re dealing with the stream and the spray as well.  However, once you get the hang of it, you’ll be navigating these controls like a pro in no time.

 

Moen Arbor One-Handle High Arc Pulldown Kitchen Faucet

Moen Arbor One-Handle High Arc Pulldown Kitchen Faucet

Our final pick for best kitchen faucets is available in 4 different finishes:  Matte Black, Chrome, Oil-Rubbed Bronze and Spot Resist Stainless.  And, this is a simply designed faucet which will work with every decor, from traditional to modern and everything in between.

The Moen Arbor One-Handle High Arc Pulldown Kitchen Faucet accommodates a mounting hole size of 2-1/2 inches.  Furthermore, this kitchen faucet will need a backsplash clearance of at least 1-1/2 inches.  However, some consumers say they don’t even need that much room.

This kitchen faucet has a height of 15-1/2 inches, a spout reach of 7-7/8 inches and a base width of 3-1/2 inches.  In addition, this is a high arc sink but the spout sits somewhere in-between.  So, it should work just fine with a deep or shallow sink.

The Moen Arbor Pulldown Kitchen Faucet is made with metal construction and features a 68 inch braided hose.  This braided hose has a reflex system for easy and smooth operation.  And, it comes with secure docking system to keep the hose in place when not in use.

This kitchen faucet offers three functions:  stream, spray and pause.  To operate the stream function, simply use the one-handle lever.  And, to operate the spray and pause function, you will find a button on the spout that you can conveniently operate while using the hose.

Furthermore, this kitchen faucet offers Power Boost™ Technology which allows you to boost the water performance and allow for more water to flow through in a record amount of time.

Pros:

Moen has been around since the 1940’s and they have consistently put out quality plumbing-ware.  So, this is a highly trusted company.

In addition, with this pick for best kitchen faucets, it is quality constructed and easy to use.  And, the other easy thing about this kitchen faucet is it’s easy to install.  However, some consumers say it is easier with 2 people.

Cons:

After a few years, some consumers have complained about leaks.  But, it’s important to note that these consumers are in the minority.  These types of leaks can happen with any product, and a lot of times it’s just an easy fix.

 

best latte machine

Best Latte Machine for Every Connoisseur

The first step into purchasing the best latte machine is knowing exactly what you’re looking for.  Latte machines can be rather simple or complex.  And, usually you can determine what you need depending on what type of connoisseur you are.  There are coffee snobs and then there are people who consider coffee to be just coffee.  And, in this case, a latte to be just a latte.

So, if you’re always in search for the best latte, we suggest going with a more complex, and consequently, more expensive machine.  If you’re one of those who really can’t tell the difference from one latte to another, we suggest going with a more simplistic latte machine.

On our list for best latte machine, we chose 5 of the top machines on the market.  These latte machines are highly-regarded by connoisseurs and non-connoisseurs alike.  And, when we say highly-regarded, this means they pass with flying colors for their quality and the frothy lattes they deliver.

 

Best Latte Machine

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Breville BNE800BSS Nespresso Creatista Plus
Breville
BNE800BSS Nespresso Creatista Plus
7 Coffee Variaties
11 Temperature Levels
8 Froth Texture Levels
19 Pressure Levels
12.5" x 7" x 12"
Mr. Coffee Cafe Latte Maker
Mr. Coffee
Cafe Latte Maker
24 oz Capacity
Automatic Shutoff
Milk Frother
11.9" x 6.9" x 13.8"
Breville Duo Temp Pro Espresso Machine
Breville
Duo Temp Pro Espresso Machine
15 Bar Pump
Steam Wand
Automatic Frother
Milk Container
15.5" x 13.3" x 17.6"
Mr. Coffee Cafe Barista Premium Espresso & Cappuccino System
Mr. Coffee
Cafe Barista Premium Espresso & Cappuccino System
15 Bar Pump
Automatic Frother
Color Options
11.2" x 8.9" x 12.6"
Saeco HD8924/47 PicoBaristo Automatic Milk Frother Espresso Machine
Saeco
HD8924/47 PicoBaristo Automatic Milk Frother Espresso Machine
8 Coffee Variaties
5 Strength Settings
10 Grinder Settings
Automatic Milk Frother
19.5" x 11" x 18

 

Best Latte Machine

 

Breville BNE800BSS Nespresso Creatista Plus

Breville BNE800BSS Nespresso Creatista Plus

Our first pick for best latte machine is a fantastic choice for those who are particular about their latte.  And, not only a latte, but a ristretto, espresso, cappuccino, macchiato, lungo and more.

The Breville BNE800BSS Nespresso Creatista Plus offers an automatic beverage selection with adjustable settings.  These adjustasble settings include coffee measurement, milk temperature and milk texture.

The coffee measurment setting allows you to adjust the amount of espresso volume.  While, the milk temperature setting offers 11 settings between 133 degrees and 169 degrees Fahrenheit, with a 3 second heat-up time.  And, the milk texture setting offers 8 textures of froth.

All of these settings are displayed on an LCD display which will guide and assist you throughout the process.  In addition, this LCD display will guide you through maintenance such as cleaning and descaling.

The Breville BNE800BSS Nespresso Creatista Plus features 19 bars of pressure.  And, for those who are new to the game, the more bars of pressure you have, the faster the coffee will extract.  However, according to our friends at the Perfect Daily Grind, 9 bars is the ideal pressure for the perfect cup of espresso.

Lastly, this latte machine comes with a a stainless steel milk jug.  And, it features a 1.5 Liter tank which will yield about a week’s worth of lattes.

Pros:

The Breville Nespresso Creatista Plus makes some fabulous froth.  And, because it offers 8 textures of froth, you’re able to froth to your exact specifications.

Furthermore, this latte machine features a large water tank, which will most likely last you a week, or even longer.

Cons:

This latte machine only allows for espresso pods and requires Nespresso espresso capsules.  For some people, this is a positive feature; less mess and a perfect grind.

However, not everyone is a fan of the pods and this can be a huge negative.

 

Mr. Coffee Cafe Latte Maker

Mr. Coffee Cafe Latte Maker

This pick for best latte maker is as simple as it gets.  So, this one is for those who love lattes, but yet, a latte is just a latte is just a latte.

The Mr. Coffee Cafe Latte Maker is a one-touch automatic latte maker which not only brews lattes, but hot chocolate as well.

This 24 ounce latte maker simotaneously brews coffee or espresso and froths milk.  Once finished with the brew process, the Mr. Coffee Cafe Latte Maker automatically shuts off.

To clean this latte maker, simply run the brew basket through the dishwasher and wipe the carafe with a damp cloth as this carafe is not dishwasher safe.  

Finally, included is a 20 recipe book for how to create everthing from a classic latte to a gingerbread latte.  And, of course, hot chocolate.

Pros:

This latte machine is about as hassle-free as you’re going to get.  And, for being so simple, it makes a surprisingly fantastic latte.

Furthermore, it’s a perfect solution for a large household.

Cons:

The Mr. Coffee Cafe Latte Maker does not brew regular coffee.  However, a consumer seemed to figure out the trick.  Instead of filling the frother with milk, fill it with water.  And, this seems to do the trick.

In addition, the carafe is not dishwasher safe.  Although, it doesn’t take very long to just rinse it out or wipe it down.

 

Breville Duo Temp Pro Espresso Machine

Breville Duo Temp Pro Espresso Machine

This latte machine is a great choice for a household of 2 or more coffee snobs.  The Breville Duo Temp Pro Espresso Machine offers all the features of a professional latte machine.  And, it’s fitting for 2 as it offers the ability to make 1 or 2 espresso shots at once.

This latte machine has a 15 bar Italian-style pump which automatically begins with a low pressure and slowly graduates to an intense pressure.  And, this particular method of espresso extraction is used by professional baristas.

The Breville Duo Temp Pro Espresso Machine has a 1 or 2-cup single or dual wall filter basket which will manually control the volume of espresso. Once the espresso is extracted, simply steam the milk with the traditional-style frother.  This frother is made of heavy-duty stainless steel, has a 360 degree swivel and offers a safety handle for helping to prevent burns while handling the wand.

This pick for best latte machine features quite the tank.  It features a 61 ounce water tank which should last a week or more.  Of course, this all depends on your latte intake.  Furthermore, the Breville Duo Temp Pro Espresso Machine has a built in water filter which will help reduce contaminents.

Pros:

This latte machine is extremely easy and great machine to learn on.  In addition, the water heats up fast, so there’s little downtime from having no latte to having a latte.

Furthermore, many consumers rave this latte machine is consistant and reliable.

Cons:

Some consumers have complained this latte machine contains plastic parts.  Unfortunately, though, at this price point, you will be seeing plastic parts with the majority of the machines out there.

And, a couple of consumers have complained this latte machine is rather loud.  Perhaps, it’s a sign that it’s working well.  Although, we must say, most latte machines are rather noisy and we don’t find this one to be anything out of the extroidanary.

 

Mr. Coffee Cafe Barista Premium Espresso & Cappuccino System

Mr. Coffee Cafe Barista Premium Espresso & Cappuccino System

This pick for best latte machine is another great one for those who would rather not deal with the complexities of a more expensive machine.  The Mr. Coffee Cafe Barista Premium Espresso & Cappuccino System is a semi-automatic machine which brews espresso, cuppauccino and lattes.

This latte machine features a one-touch control panel which will allow you to select the drink of your choice.  And, it has a 15 bar pump, which will extract commercial-quality espresso.  Furthermore, this latte machine has an automatic milk frother to froth the perfect latte everytime.

And, with the Mr. Coffee Cafe Barista, you will be able to select a single or a double shot.  Which, makes this a great option for 2 or more latte lovers.

Finally, this latte machine comes in your choice of 3 colors:  White, Red or Stainless Steel.

Pros:

The Mr. Coffee Cafe Barista is extremely easy to use and a great choice for those who just don’t want to deal.  And, it brews a latte, cappuccino or espresso quickly and easily.

Furthermore, this latte machine has a cleaning system which is simple to operate.  Just press a button to run hot water through the extraction tube or the milk frother.

Cons:

A minority of consumers complained the water tank leaked within months of use.  And, another minority of consumers said this latte machine broke down within months.

Furthermore, there were other consumers who complained the milk wasn’t frothing hot enough.

Saeco HD8924/47 PicoBaristo Automatic Milk Frother Espresso Machine

Saeco HD8924/47 PicoBaristo Automatic Milk Frother Espresso Machine

Our final pick for best latte machine is a high-end machine for those who are serious about their lattes.  And, the Saeco HD8924/47 PicoBaristo Automatic Milk Frother Espresso Machine offers 8 coffee varieties.  Some of these varities include espresso, espresso lungo, ristretto, cafe crema, cappicino, espresso double and cafe latte.

In addition, not only does this latte machine offer 8 coffee varities, it also offers 10 grinder settings for a more intense latte experience or for those days where you just need a small pick me up.

This latte machine operates by a one-touch automatic system.  Simply choose a coffee variety, push a button and the espresso will extract.  And, the same works with the froth.  Just push a button and the automatic milk frother will do all the work for you.

The Saeco HD8924/47 PicoBaristo also features a strength selection which will remember how strong you like your espresso.

Finally, this latte machine has an AquaClean filter which can deliver up to 5,000 lattes without descaling.

Pros:

This latte machine is extremely customizable – from the strength of the espresso, to the grinder settings, to the coffee temperature.  And, it really does just about everything for you with a professional outcome.

Furthermore, this latte machine allows for ground coffee beans or whole beans. 

And, The Saeco PicoBaristo is fairly easy to learn and simple to operate.  Just be sure to read the instructions thoroughly before use and you shouldn’t have any issues.

Cons:

Depending on your space, this can be a good thing or a bad thing.  But, make sure you have the adequate space for this machine.  The Saeco PicoBaristo is narrow but long.  And, you will need space to flip the top cover open for beans and water.

Lastly, this latte machine is on the expensive side.  But, it is a high-end and high-quality machine.  And, without ordering a latte out everyday, will pay for itself over time.  Probably sooner than you can imagine.

best hammock with stand

Best Hammock with Stand – Wood or Steel

In order to find the best hammock with stand, we relied heavily on consumer reviews.  The reason for this is, the best hammock with stand needs to be durable.  And, if it’s going to hold our weight, we want to make sure we can trust it.  So, the most important aspect of a hammock is it’s going to be our friend, not our enemy.

The next aspect we looked for in the best hammock with stand is it has to look good.  When a hammock looks good, it looks more inviting.  And, when it looks more inviting, you will get more lounging out of it.  But, we are suckers for great aesthetics and design anyway, so this aspect is always on the forefront for us.

best hammock with stand

Finally, we looked for quality materials and quality construction.  Of course, with quality materials and construction, the hammock is going to be durable.  But, it’s also going to feel great – especially with quality material for the part you lounge on.

After all was said and done, our final 6 best hammocks exceeded our expectations.  And, these are some of the most highly regarded and trustworthy hammocks on the market.

So, which one is the right hammock for you?  Well, we have chosen an array of 1 and 2 person hammocks, each containing a weight restriction.  And, as long as you pay close attention to the restrictions, you will be on your way to owning the best hammock just for you, and perhaps some lucky partner.

 

Best Hammock with Stand

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Giantex Wooden Curved Arc Wide Hammock Swing Stand Set
Giantex
Wooden Curved Arc Wide Hammock Swing Stand Set
Russia Larch Wood Stand
Polyester Cotton Hammock
1 Person/264 Lbs Max
Sizes Options
123" x 46" x 48"
142" x 50" x 51"
161.4" x 47.2" x 48"
Vivere Double Hammock with Space Saving Stand
Vivere
Double Hammock with Space Saving Stand
Heavy Gauge Steel Stand
100% Cotton Hammock
2 Person/450 Lbs Max
Color Options
130" x 94" x 63"
Sunnydaze Decor Large 2 Person Spreader Bar Hammock with Stand
Sunnydaze Decor
Large 2 Person Spreader Bar Hammock with Stand
Steel Stand
Polyester Hammock
Wood Spreader Bars
2 Person/350 Lbs Max
Color Options

157" x 55" x 48"
Sorbus Hammock with Spreader Bars
Sorbus
Hammock with Spreader Bars
Powder-Coated Steel Stand
Cotton Hammock
Wood Spreader Bars
2 Person/450 Lbs Max
Color Options
147" x 47" x 47"
Caribbean Hammocks Jumbo Caribbean Hammock Stand Combo
Caribbean Hammocks
Jumbo Caribbean Hammock Stand Combo
20 Gauge Steel Stand
Polyester Hammock
Wood Spreader Bars
2 Person/600 Lbs Max
Color Options
156" x 55"
Lazy Daze Hammocks Double Hammock with Space Saving Stand
Lazy Daze Hammocks
Double Hammock with Space Saving Stand
Powder-Coated Steel Stand
Canvas Hammock
2 Person/450 Lbs Max
Color Options
115" x 48" x 30"

 

Best Hammock with Stand

Giantex Wooden Curved Arc Wide Hammock Swing Stand Set

Giantex Wooden Curved Arc Wide Hammock Swing Stand Set

Our first pick for best hammock with stand is a one person hammock with a maximum weight limit of 264 pounds.  And, it measures 142 inches long, 50 inches wide, 51 inches tall and weighs 61 pounds.  However, there are size options.  This particular one is the mid-range option, so you can go smaller or larger.

The Giantex Wooden Curved Arc Wide Hammock Swing Stand Set is made of Russia Larch Wood.  According to Russian Lumber, the Russian Larch is a softwood tree with properties of real hardwood.  Furthermore, the annual rings are very wide, which make this wood particularly strong.

The hammock is made of 260 gram polyester cotton with a woven texture and comes in a soft cream color.  And, this color will go with every environment and every decor.

The Giantex Wooden Curved Arc Hammock Stand Set features wooden stretcher bars and durable hanging loops.  And, like the name of this product suggests, you have a swinging option with this hammock.  So, with the durability of the construction, feel free to lounge during the day and swing away at night.

Pros:

This pick for best hammock with stand is extremely sturdy and solid.

Furthermore, it is ergonomically designed for a modern take on the classic hammock.  So, it’s going to look sleek and worth every penny.

And, if you wish to make this a double hammock, this stand is durable enough to fit a double or extra wide hammock.

Cons:

Some consumers say this was fairly easy to assemble while others had a more difficult time.  

Vivere Double Hammock with Space Saving Stand

Vivere Double Hammock with Space Saving Stand

This pick can be used for 1 or 2 people and has a weight limit of 450 pounds.  The Vivere Double Hammock with Space Saving Stand measures 130 inches  long, 94 inches wide, 63 inches tall and weighs 34 pounds.

And, this hammock features a space-saving stand made out of heavy gauge steel.  So, not only is it space-saving, it is ultra durable.

The Vivere Double Hammock is made of 100% cotton and comes in your choice of striped color combinations:  Denim, Desert Moon, Oasis, Rio Night, Salsa and Tropical.

Finally, this hammock comes with a carrying case and is ultra lightweight.  So, you can take it to the park with you.

Pros:

Because it’s well-constructed and made with heavy gauge steel, this hammock is super durable.  And, some consumers went over the weight capacity and are pleasantly unscathed.  But, of course, we don’t recommend this.

In addition, the Vivere Double Hammock is very easy to assemble.  And, it is rather lightweight so you can pretty much take it anywhere.

Cons:

Because this hammock is made of 100% cotton, for your safety, you’re going to need to take extra care of it.  When cotton is exposed to certain types of weather, such as rain, it can deteriorate over time.  And, once it deteriorates, it’s an accident waiting to happen.

Sunnydaze Decor Large 2 Person Spreader Bar Hammock with Stand

Sunnydaze Decor Large 2 Person Spreader Bar Hammock with Stand

This pick for best hammock with stand is built for 1 or 2 people and measures 157 inches long, 55 inches wide and 48 inches tall.  And, overall, this hammock and stand weighs 44 pounds and has a 350 pound weight capacity.

The Sunnydaze Decor Large 2 Person Spreader Bar Hammock features as steel stand with a hand-woven soft-spun polyester.  Furthermore, this polyester hammock has wooden spreader bars which are weather-resistant.

And, this hammock comes in your choice of colors:  Blue, Cream, Green, Mocha, Multi-Color, Red, Sky Blue, Tan and Yellow.

The Sunnydaze Decor 2 Person Hammock is attached by zinc-coated, 9-inch chains and 2 3-inch s-hooks.  This will ensure the hammock is secure for your safety.

Pros:

The rope construction of the hammock is soft and comfortable.  Furthermore, the wooden stretcher bars give this hammock extra style.

In addition, this hammock is extremely table and sturdy.  And, it’s also easy to assemble.

Cons:

Because the Sunnydaze Decor 2 Person Hammock Stand has a 350 pound weight capacity, it may only work for 1 person in your household.

Also, some consumers state the material is a bit saggy and it stretches over time.

Sorbus Hammock with Spreader Bars

Sorbus Hammock with Spreader Bars

This hammock with stand accommodates 2 people at a maximum weight of 450 pounds.  The Sorbus Hammock with Spreader Bars measures 147 inches long, 47 inches wide, 47 inches tall and it weighs roughly 45 pounds.

This hammock stand is constructed with powder-coated steel and a durable cotton hammock which is weather and UV resistant.  And, this hammock comes in your choice of color combinations:  Green/Blue, Blue/Red, Mocha and Blue/Aqua.  Furthermore, the hammock is washable.  

The Sorbus Hammock comes with solid wood spreader bars attached to heavy-duty rope.  And, with these durable materials, your safety will be ensured.

Finally, this 2-person hammock comes with a detachable pillow which will accommodate 2 people.

Pros:

The Sorbus Hammock with Spreader Bars is extremely simply to assemble.

Furthermore, consumers rave about how sturdy and durable this hammock is.  And, they also rave about how comfortable it is.

Cons:

This hammock may be a little tricky to get in and out of.  You may need to steady yourself in the middle and carefully position your feet so as to not end up with a faceplant.

Caribbean Hammocks Jumbo Caribbean Hammock Stand Combo

Caribbean Hammocks Jumbo Caribbean Hammock Stand Combo

This next pick can accommodate 1 or 2 people at a maximum weight capacity of 600 pounds.  The Caribbean Hammocks Jumbo Caribbean Hammock Stand Combo measures 156 inches long and 55 inches wide.

This hammock stand is made with 20-gauge, cold-rolled, powder-coated steel.  And, with cold-rolled steel, this stand is going to offer uniformity and will have an extremely smooth surface.  Furthermore, with the powder coating, this will help protect the stand from rust and corrosion.

The hammock is made out of soft-spun polyester with a micro-weave and comes in your choice of colors:  Cream, Dark Blue, Green, Light Blue, Mocha, Olive, Orange, Purple, Rainbow, Red, Tan, Yellow, Crimson, Multi Color Dark Blue, Multi Color Light Blue, Multi Color Orange, Multi Color Purple and Multi Color Yellow.

The Caribbean Hammocks Jumbo Caribbean Hammock Stand Combo is easy to assemble and features easy-snap assembly.  And, this stand can be assembled in under 5 minutes.  So, if you’re preconceiving moving this hammock from one location to the next, breaking this hammock down and setting it up will be a cinch.

Pros:

We love that this hammock comes in so many different colors.  And, these color options offer a vibrancy usually only found in the Caribbean.

Furthermore, the stand is ultra sturdy and the hammock is soft and comfortable.  It is also a cinch to put together, especially for those of us who would rather be lounging.

Cons:

The Caribbean Hammocks Jumbo Caribbean Hammock Stand Combo may be difficult to get in and out of.

In addition, some may find this hammock to sag too much for their liking.  However, you can tighten it if need be.

Lazy Daze Hammocks Double Hammock with Space Saving Stand

Lazy Daze Hammocks Double Hammock with Space Saving Stand

Our final pick for best hammock with stand accommodates a maximum of 2 people and a maximum weight capacity of 450 pounds.  And, this hammock measures 115 inches long, 48 inches wide and 30 inches tall.

The Lazy Daze Hammocks Double Hammock Stand is built with heavy-duty steel with a powder coating.  And, this powder coating is resistant to weather and it will protect it from rust.  Furthermore, the ends of the stand are capped in plastic for a finished look.

This hammock is made with canvas and is machine washable.  And, with this pick, you get your choice of color combinations:  Lime & Orange Stripe, Oasis Stripe and Techno.

Finally, the Lazy Daze Hammocks Double Hammock is a space-saving option and a portable option.  It assembles and disassembles in a matter of minutes and can be folded down to fit inside the included carrying bag.

Pros:

For the price, you get a whole lot of bang for your buck.

Furthermore, it’s extremely sturdy and well constructed.  And, it’s portable.  So, take it camping or to the lake with you.

Cons:

Some consumers had missing parts when the hammock arrived.

In addition, some consumers found it difficult to fit all the parts in the carrying bag.  So, if you like puzzles, this may be the hammock for you.

best reclining sofa

Best Reclining Sofa – Top 6 Comfortable Picks

If you’re looking for the best reclining sofa for the ultimate lounge session, we have the top 5 comfortable and movie-night worthy picks on the market.  And, these picks are not only comfortable, they look great as well.

So, how did we manage to find the best reclining sofas?  Well, we are professional shoppers with a whole lot of experience, so that does help.  And, we started out with a list of all the qualities we want in the best reclining sofa and then we checked it twice.

First up on our list in search of the best reclining sofa is it has to look great.  And, if a sofa looks great, it’s going to be all that more inviting to sit in.

Next, we insist on nothing but quality.  That means, quality materials and quality construction.  Furthermore, the company has to have a quality reputation and they have to stand behind their product.

And, if the sofa is made out of quality materials with quality construction, that means it is going to be durable and is going to take years and years of being sat on, slept on and in some cases, jumped on.

Our final step on our list to picking out the best reclining sofa is to keep tabs on consumer reviews, and ultimately, consumer satisfaction.  There really is no better way to gage a product than to take it from first hand accounts.  And, with our final 5 picks for best reclining sofa, these are some of the most highly regarded sofas currently available.

So, if you’ve got your movie picked out, but all you need is a sofa, check out our final picks below.

 

Best Reclining Sofa

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Serta Palisades Reclining Sectional
Serta
Palisades Reclining Sectional
Upholstery
Hidden Storage
Right/Left Chaise Option
Color Options
89" x 32" x 36"
VIVA HOME Reclining Sofa
VIVA HOME
Reclining Sofa
Leather
PU
36" x 37" x 40"
57" x 37" x 40"
78" x 37" x 40"
Homelegance Nicasio Contemporary All Genuine Power Reclining Sofa
Homelegance
Nicasio Contemporary All Genuine Power Reclining Sofa
Leather
Color Options
66" x 37" x 39.25"
87" x 37" x 39.25"
Ashley Krismen Collection 7810215 Power Reclining Sofa
Ashley
Krismen Collection 7810215 Power Reclining Sofa
USB Port85" x 45" x 45"
Homelegance 9668BRW-3 Double Reclining Sofa
Homelegance
9668BRW-3 Double Reclining Sofa
Leather
Vinyl
Color Options
83" x 38.5" x 40"
90" x 38.5" x 40"

 

Best Reclining Sofa

 

Ashley Krismen Collection 7810215 Power Reclining Sofa

Ashley Krismen Collection 7810215 Power Reclining Sofa

Our first pick for best reclining sofa is one that will keep you in your seat.  And, that’s because this power reclining sofa has a USB port to charge your phone, computer or tablet.

And, not only will it keep you charged, it will offer you unlimited comfort.  The Ashley Krismen Collection 7810215 Sofa offers a power adjustable headrest and footrest.  In addition, it is made with 100% chenille-woven polyester for a soft and cushy feel.  Furthermore, the seat cushions are made with high-resiliency foam with a top layer of thick poly fiber.

This reclining sofa offers dual-sided reclining while the middle seat stays stationary.  And, the back and seat cushions also stay stationary as they are attached to the couch.

Lastly, this sofa measures 85 inches long, 45 inches wide, 45 inches tall and weighs 284 pounds.

Pros:

You really can’t go wrong with a USB port, that’s one of the huge advantages of this couch.  And then all you need is the best TV tray and you literally won’t have to go anywhere.  

Furthermore, this couch is solid and well-constructed.  It is ultra comfortable and with the chenille-woven polyester, it’s going to hold up well.

Cons:

Like many reclining sofas, the middle does not recline.

In addition, charcoal is the only color offered at this moment.  However, it is a great color which tends to blend in well with many different environments and decor.

 

VIVA HOME Reclining Sofa

VIVA HOME Reclining Sofa

This next pick for best reclining sofa is a great option for people on either end of the height and weight spectrum.  The VIVA HOME Reclining Sofa features wide seats with a depth of 19.69 inches.  So, there will be plenty of room to accommodate just about anyone.

This reclining sofa is made of high-quality leather with the sides covered in PU.  According to Patch, PU is a split leather with a layer of polyurethane.  And, the main benefit to this is it is easy clean.  Additionally, it has the appearance of 100% leather, so it’s going to look great.

The VIVA HOME Reclining Sofa offers a backrest and a footrest, all controlled by a handle located on the side of the couch.

This reclining sofa comes in your choice of sizes:  36 inches by 37 inches by 40 inches, 57 inches by 37 inches by 40 inches and 78 inches by 37 inches by 40 inches.

Pros:

Because of the excellent seat depth and width, this couch will comfortably accommodate everyone.

Furthermore, the leather is top-notch and the VIVA HOME Reclining Sofa is well-constructed.

Cons:

There’s not much to complain about with this couch.  If anything, you might be too comfortable and that could lead to laziness.

But, like a lot of reclining sofas out there, the middle seat does not recline.  So, someone is going to have to go without. 

 

Homelegance Nicasio Contemporary All Genuine Leather Power Reclining Sofa

Homelegance Nicasio Contemporary All Genuine Leather Power Reclining Sofa

If you’re looking for the whole setup, this pick gives you the option of a reclining sofa, loveseat and chair.  However, if you’re just looking for a reclining sofa, these options all come separately.  

The Homelegance Nicasio Contemporary All Genuine Leather Power Reclining Sofa is extremely comfortable, featuring low-profile arm rests and overstuffed cushions.  Furthermore, because this reclining sofa is made with high quality leather, it’s going to increase the comfort all that much more.  And, the sides of the couch are made of PU aka split leather, which is matched to look like the seat cushions.  

This reclining sofa offers a power reclining system which you can operate from either side of the couch.  And, this will allow you to fully recline the seats with just a push of a button.

The Homelegance Nicasio Contemporary Power Reclining Sofa measures 87 inches long, 37 inches deep and 39.25 inches tall.  It comes in your choice of 2 colors:  Black or Dark Brown.

Pros:

This reclining sofa offers a high back and low-profile arm rests, making it extremely comfortable.  In addition, the cushions are plush which only adds to the comfort.

And, the motor on this power reclining sofa is extremely quiet.

Furthermore, assembly is easy and won’t require any tools.

Cons:

There are a couple of complaints that a bar was bent during the shipping process.  However, this is easy to straighten out and was not considered a deal breaker.

In addition, the armrests are attached with velcro.  And, you may hear the velcro shifting around at times.

 

Serta Palisades Reclining Sectional

Serta Palisades Reclining Sectional

This pick for best reclining sofa is an extremely functional option.  And, this is because you can lounge or recline.  Not only that, it also comes with storage which is convenient for storing blankets and pillows.

The Serta Palisades Reclining Sectional comes with a chaise which features storage inside.  And, with this pick, you have your option of a right or left chaise sectional to fit in the space you’re working with.

In addition, this sofa will recline only on the far side – away from the chaise lounge.  So, you have one of each seat options with this couch:  Lounge, stationary and recline.

This reclining sofa is constructed with a hardwood frame and soft, polyester upholstery.  Furthermore, the Serta Palisades Reclining Sectional comes in your choice of colors.  And, with these colors comes different fabrics and textures.  Choose between Chestnut Brown, Fawn Tan, Flagstone, Glacial Gray, Silica Sand, Riverfront Brown, Chestnut Brown, Beige, Dusk Beige, Grey, Moonlight Grey, Oatmeal or Warm Oatmeal.

In addition, the Serta Palisades Reclining Sectional comes in your choice of styles and sizes:  Right Sectional, Left Sectional, Loveseat and Armchair.  However, the only options that recline are the Left and Right Sectional.  But, these other options will make for a great set it you’re looking to outfit your whole space.

This reclining sofa measures 32 inches wide, 89 inches long and 36 inches tall.  It weighs 198 pounds.

Pros:

This pick for best reclining sofa is a great space-saving option.  Furthermore, the Serta Palisades Reclining Sectional is firm, yet supportive.  In addition, the upholstery is soft and 2 matching throw pillows are included.

This sofa recliner is easy to assemble, with some consumers saying it took them less than an hour.

Cons:

The seat lacks depth, so this is a great pick for those who are on the shorter end of the spectrum.  However, this isn’t so great for those who are taller.  So, if you’re an upwards of 6 feet tall, you might want to choose a different couch.

Furthermore, the cushions on this reclining sofa are not reversible.  But, the good news is, the upholstery is removable and is washable.

Lastly, there are a few complaints with the quality of zippers and sagging seat cushions.  In addition, there are complaints that the seat cushions slide when you’re sitting on them.

 

Homelegance 9668BRW-3 Double Reclining Sofa

Homelegance 9668BRW-3 Double Reclining Sofa

Our final pick for best reclining sofa is a handsome sofa that is great for traditional decor.  The Homelegance 9668BRW-3 Double Reclining Sofa features classic rolled arms and nail head tufted accents.

This reclining sofa is made of bonded leather, which means it’s a mixture of 74% polyester, 18% leather and 8% cotton.  Furthermore, the sides of the couch are made of PU, which is a blend of 90% polyester and 10% cotton.

The Homelegance 9668BRW-3 Double Reclining Sofa offers a lever on either side of the couch to operate the recline feature.  And, like most reclining sofas, the middle seat stays stationary.

And, if you’re looking for a sofa set, this style comes with the following options:  Chair, Loveseat, Power RCLN Chair and Power RCLN Sofa.  Furthermore, it comes in your choice of Brown or Black.

Finally, the Homelegance Double Reclining Sofa measures 90 inches long, 38.5 inches wide and 40 inches tall.

Pros:

This is a whole lot of couch for the price.  And, it’s a fantastic pick for those on a budget.

Furthermore, it’s sturdy and durable, so expect it to last for a while.

Cons:

Because it is made with bonded leather as opposed to 100% leather, it isn’t going to last as long as leather would.  You will eventually see wear and tear with the bonded leather.  However, again, for the price, this is a fantastic deal.

In addition, if you’re 6’0 or above, you may want to consider another couch – taller consumers have complained that they don’t fit quite right.

Lastly, some consumers have complained about foot rest malfunction after months of owning this sofa.  And, again, this is a budget option, so be aware that you may be in the same boat.  Especially if you tend to make good use of your couch.

best murphy bed

Best Murphy Bed – Top Wall and Cabinet Picks

If you’re looking for the best Murphy bed, or perhaps the best solution for a stow-a-way bed, we scouted the earth for the best Murphy and cabinet beds and came away with 6 amazing picks.

However, if you’re open to additional solutions, feel free to check out our picks for the best sofa beds, the best futons and the best folding beds.

But, if you’re set on a Murphy bed or a cabinet bed, then all you need to do is decide which one of these is going to work for your needs.

So, which solution is right for you?

If you already know exactly what you’re looking for, check out our picks for 6 best Murphy beds and Cabinet bed.  If you would like some assistance, we have a Buyer’s Guide at the end of this post to help you decide which solution is best for you.

 

Best Murphy Bed & Cabinet Bed

 MaterialSpecsPrice
Bestar Nebula Full Wall Bed
Bestar
Nebula Full Wall Bed
Particle Board
Euroslat Mattress Support
Dual Piston System
Mattress Not Included
Boxspring Not Required
Color Options
Full
Queen
BurlesonHomeFurnishings Coastline Solid Wood Murphy Hideaway Bed
BurlesonHomeFurnishings
Coastline Solid Wood Murphy Hideaway Bed
Solid Wood
Handmade
Slat Mattress Support
Nightstands
Mattress Not Included
Boxspring Not Required
Full
Arason Enterprises Creden-ZzZ Cabinet Bed
Arason Enterprises
Creden-ZzZ Cabinet Bed
MDF
Wood Veneer
Memory Foam Mattress
Storage Drawers
Style Options
Queen
Bestar Edge Queen Wall Bed with Storage
Bestar
Edge Queen Wall Bed with Storage
Particle Board
Euroslat Mattress Support
Dual Piston System
Mattress Not Included
Boxspring Not Required
Color Options
Queen
Bowery Hill Full Wall Bed
Bowery Hill
Full Wall Bed
Wood
Mattress Support
Mattress Not Included
Boxspring Not Required
Full
Easy DIY Murphy Bed Kit Wall Bed
Easy DIY Murphy Bed Kit
Vertical Mount Wall Bed
Easy Lift Piston System
Fold Up Legs
Step-By-Step Guide
Wood Not Included
Mattress Not Included
Queen

 

Best Murphy Bed & Cabinet Bed

 

Bestar Nebula Full Wall Bed

Bestar Nebula Full Wall Bed

The Bestar Nebula Full Wall Bed comes in your choice of colors and 2 sizes.  Choose between Antigua, Grey or White and a full or queen size.

This pick for best Murphy bed is made of high-density commercial-grade particle board and features a Euroslat mattress support system.  According to European Sleep Works, these flexible slat systems have numerous advantages over a box spring.  The Euroslat mattress support will adjust to the ever-changing contours of your body.  In addition, it increases air circulation and allows your mattress to breath.  Which, in turn, keeps your mattress dry and allows for a healthier sleep environment.

Therefore, with the Bestar Nebula Wall Bed, a box spring is not required.  Furthermore, a mattress is not included.  So, you will have the freedom to choose a mattress that’s right for you.

When choosing a mattress, it needs to weigh at least 70 pounds in order to keep the Murphy bed weighted down while in the open position.  In addition, this Murphy bed accommodates a mattress up to 10 inches thick.

Now, the first step in choosing the best Murphy bed for you is determining if you have the required space.  The Bestar Nebula Wall Bed needs a wall height of at least 86 inches tall.  In addition, it will need a clearance of at least 87.3 inches when the bed is extended and a clearance of 9.6 inches of space under the bed.

This Murphy bed requires some assembly, however, it is easy to install.  Furthermore, this wall bed is easy to use.  Just pull the handle and the dual piston system will allow the bed to open easily and smoothly.  Then, flip the leg down onto the floor to stabilize it.  Once you’re ready to pack up, just reverse the process.

Pros:

The Bestar Nebula Wall Bed is very sturdy and durable.  And, because it’s made with high-quality partical board, this bed is going to last a long time.

Furthermore, assembly is fairly easy, but it will take about a day to put together.  However, there is an option for expert assembly for those who don’t want to be bothered.

Cons:

Of course, we would all love to have real wood instead of particle board.  And, if you’re set on real wood, our next pick for best Murphy bed is handmade with solid wood and is absolutely gorgeous.

 

BurlesonHomeFurnishings Coastline Solid Wood Murphy Hideaway Bed

BurlesonHomeFurnishings Coastline Solid Wood Murphy Hideaway Bed

This pick for best Murphy bed is full of character and absolutely stunning.  The BurlesonHomeFurnishings Coastline Solid Wood Murphy Hideaway Bed is handmade with solid wood with a beautiful dark stain finish.

This Murphy bed features a slat mattress support system which will give comfort and support without the need for a box spring.  In addition, this unit doesn’t come with a mattress.  However, that gives you the freedom to find the perfect mattress just for you.  And, with this pick, it can hold a mattress up to 10 inches thick.

The BurlesonHomeFurnishings Coastline Hideaway Bed comes with 2 nightstands which are conveniently built into the doors.  Just unlatch and the nightstands will easily fold out.

This Murphy bed comes in a full size and measures 69 inches wide, 21.5 inches deep and 87 inches tall.  When opened, this bed measures 117 inches wide, 84 inches deep and 87 inches tall.

Pros:

What can we say, this piece is absolutely gorgeous.  It is made of solid wood and is extremely durable.  And, this is a piece that’s going to last a lifetime.

Furthermore, we love nightstands and the additional thought that went into those.

Cons:

We can’t say this is a con, but it’s going to take some heavy lifting to get this Murphy bed where you want it.  Because the BurlesonHomeFurnishings Hideaway Bed is made of solid wood, it is heavy.

 

Arason Enterprises Creden-ZzZ Cabinet Bed

Arason Enterprises Creden-ZzZ Cabinet Bed

This pick for best cabinet bed is a great budget option.  This is because the Arason Enterpirises Creden-ZzZ Cabinet Bed is an all-inclusive solution.

This cabinet bed comes with a tri-fold memory foam mattress.  In order for this mattress to fit in the cabinet, it folds down like an accordion.  And, this mattress is 6 inches thick with 4 inches of base foam, 2 inches of memory foam and will hold up to 500 pounds.

The Arason Enterprises Creden-ZzZ Cabinet bed is made with high-quality MDF and real wood veneer.  And, with MDF, it’s going to be sturdy and durable.

This cabinet bed features 2 drawers to store pillows and bedding when not in use.  In addition, the top surface offers extra storage for personal items or decor.  And, because the top features specialty hinges, it will open seamlessly without having to remove the items.

Finally, the Arason Enterprises Creden-ZzZ Cabinet Bed comes in a queen size and measures 64 inches wide, 24 inches deep and 43 inches tall.  It also comes in your choice of design options which you can find here.

Pros:

Because this cabinet bed comes with a mattress, this is a great pick for those who are on a budget.  In addition, the mattress is firm, yet extremely comfortable.

Furthermore, the Arason Enterprises Creden-ZzZ Cabinet Bed is a great looking piece of furniture, so you don’t have to worry about it looking cheap.

Cons:

This cabinet bed does need to be assembled, however, assembly is straightforward and easy.  But, if you choose not to be bothered, you can have expertly assembled.

In addition, this cabinet bed is made of MDF and it’s not the ideal material.  However, MDF is durable and will last you awhile.  Furthermore, there is real wood veneer so the appearance of this cabinet bed looks great.

 

Bestar Edge Queen Wall Bed with Storage

Bestar Edge Queen Wall Bed with Storage

This is another pick for best Murphy bed by Bestar, however, this particular option comes with additional features you might find appealing.  The Bestar Edge Queen Wall Bed comes with 2-21 inch storage units on either side of the bed.  And, these storage units are great for knick-knacks, as well as, storing bedding.

This Murphy bed is made of high-quality, commercial-grade particle board.  And, like we mentioned previously, because this particle board is high quality, this bed is durable and very sturdy.

The Bestar Edge Queen Wall Bed with Storage features a Euroslat mattress support system which will offer comfort and support without the need for a box spring.  And, this Murphy bed does not come with a mattress, so you’re free to choose the perfect mattress for you.  Just make sure the mattress you choose is no more than 12 inches thick and weighs no less than 70 pounds.

This Murphy bed also features a dual piston system which allows for seemless opening and closing of the bed.  And, to use this bed, simply pull the handle towards you and flip the leg down.  When you’re ready to pack things up, just reverse the process.

The Bestar Edge Queen Wall Bed comes in your choice of colors:  Brown or White.  And, this unit as a whole measures 107.1 inches wide, 20.1 inches deep and 89.4 inches tall.

Pros:

This Murphy bed looks great and functions wonderfully.  And, most importantly, there are a lot of satisfied consumers.

Cons:

The assembly is going to take a lot of time.  However, if you have it professionally assembled, it’s no sweat off your back.

 

Bowery Hill Full Wall Bed

Bowery Hill Full Wall Bed

This is another option for a Murphy bed that’s constructed of wood, rather than particle board.  In addition, the Bowery Hill Full Wall Bed comes with a scratch, stain and burn resistant melamine finish.

This Murphy bed features a Euroslat mattress support system which will automatically adjust to the contours of your body.  Furthermore, this slat system is designed to increase airflow which allows for a healthier sleeping environment.  And, because it features a Euroslat mattress support system, that means you won’t need to worry about a box spring.

However, you will need to provide a mattress, as this Murphy bed does not come with one.  And, when choosing a mattress, make sure the mattress is no more than 10 inches thick and weighs between 70 and 95 pounds.  In addition, the dimensions of the mattress should be no more than 54 inches wide by 75 inches long.

When considering this option for a Murphy bed, you must make sure you have enough space.  The height of your ceiling needs to be no less than 91 inches tall for installation purposes.  And, the ceiling needs to be no less than 93 inches to install the crown molding.  Furthermore, when the bed is extended, you will need a clearance of at least 93.4 inches.  And, the bed needs a clearance underneath of at least 9.5 inches.

Pros:

The Bowery Hill Full Wall Bed is easy to assemble and mounting it to the wall is fairly simple.

Furthermore, this Murphy bed has a dual piston system which allows you to safely open and close this bed.

Cons:

This Murphy bed will take some time to assemble.  However, the assembly is fairly easy.  And, you always have the option of hiring a professional.

 

Easy DIY Murphy Bed Kit Wall Bed

Easy DIY Murphy Bed Kit Vertical Mount Wall Bed

Our final pick for best Murphy bed is one for those who don’t mind getting their hands dirty.  The Easy DIY Murphy Bed Kit Vertical Mount Wall Bed is also one that you can tailor to your exact decor needs.

Because with this DIY Murphy bed kit, you get to choose your own wood.  In addition to the wood, you will need some edging tape and wood screws.  And, what this kit does come with is an easy lift piston system and a pair of fold-up legs.

Furthermore, the Easy DIY Murphy Bed Kit includes 3 guidebooks:  Step-by-Step Cutting Guide, Construction Guide and Assembly Guide.  In addition, it thankfully comes with a Step-by-Step DVD and an Illustrated Booklet Package.

This Murphy bed kit also comes with a mattress quick-release strap that will help keep the mattress stable.  However, you’re going to need a mattress once you have this all set up.  This Murphy bed requires a queen size mattress that measures 60 inches wide and 80 inches long, with a maximum height of 12 inches.  Also, the mattress should weigh between 60 and 85 pounds.

Pros:

This is a great pick for those that love projects.  And, it’s fairly simple to put together.  However, the toughest part will be cutting the wood in the correct dimensions.  But, you can have the wood cut for you if you don’t have the required tools or if you just want to make things easy on yourself.

The other aspect we like with this DIY option is you can design this exactly how you want it.  And, there’s nothing better than having something you designed and constructed yourself.

Cons:

Although this Murphy bed kit states it is easy to build, it isn’t for the faint of heart.  It’s going to require, at the very least, basic woodworking skills.  However, we suggest having more than basic woodworking skills.

 

Best Murphy Bed and Cabinet Bed Buyer’s Guide

There are a few questions to ask yourself before making the big purchase:

Should I go with a Murphy bed or a cabinet bed?

For decor sense, either one of these is going to look great.

The benefit of the Murphy bed is it tends to have an appearance that it’s flush with the wall.  Or, in some cases, it looks like a cabinet that blends in with its environment.  Whereas the cabinet bed tends to look more like a piece of furniture, as it’s shaped as a cabinet.  And, the cabinet bed is more functional in that you can use the countertop for decor, such as picture frames or vases, or personal items.

As far as comfort goes, the Murphy bed wins hands down.  And, this is because the Murphy bed allows the mattress to store in its original shape.

With the cabinet bed, it needs to fold in order to store it inside the cabinet.  However, the pick we have for best cabinet bed is a firm and comfortable mattress, something you don’t often find with a cabinet bed.  So, it’s still worth considering this option for a solution.

If I choose a Murphy bed, should I consider a DIY option?

Our DIY option is for those looking to save money.  That’s the plus side.  And, in the end, we aren’t quiet sure it saves all that much.  Because with the DIY option, you’re going to need to buy the wood in order to build it.

Furthermore, you will need basic woodworking skills and the required tools on hand to accomplish this.  So, for those that enjoy woodwork and a personal touch, this is a fabulous option to consider.

For those that failed workshop class in middle school, your best bet is to go with a Murphy bed or cabinet bed.

Is there anything else I should know about choosing a Murphy or cabinet bed?

Like we stated previously, most of our picks for Best Murphy bed do not come with a mattress.  And, this gives you the free reign over choosing the right type of mattress for you.  Furthermore, these picks do not require a box spring, so you really only have to focus on purchasing a mattress.

However, if you’re looking for an all-inclusive Murphy bed, we have a fantastic bed with an extremely comfortable and supportive mattress.  Also, our pick for best cabinet bed is also an all-inclusive option.  And, these picks are great for those who don’t want to fuss over a mattress.

best tower fan

Best Tower Fan – 5 Quiet Oscillating Fans

If you’re looking for the best tower fan that’s both oscillating and quiet, we have good news for you.  We tested and reviewed a ton of fans and came away with 5 of the most highly regarded picks on the market.

And, not only are these fans both oscillating, quiet and highly regarded, each pick has additional features you may find to be functional for your lifestyle.  For instance, one of our picks not only has a tilt feature for additional customized air circulation, it also offers 5 different speed settings.

Now, if that doesn’t sound like your cup of coffee, there is another pick which features 3 fans which are all independently controlled.  So, you can circulate the air in one direction while using the lower fan to circulate the air for your pets.  Anyway you choose to use this particular fan, it will definitely deliver cool air when and where you need it and to whom needs it.

That all being said, choosing the best tower fan that is both oscillating and quiet doesn’t have to be painful.  The pain is our job, and the pleasure is yours.  After hours upon hours of research and sifting through consumer reviews, we are pleased to present our picks for the best oscillating tower fans.

 

Best Tower Fan

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Soleus Air Tower Fan with Remote Control
Soleus
Air Tower Fan with Remote Control
Oscillating
3 Speeds
7.5 Hour Timer
Remote Control
LED Indicator Lights
35"
Seville Classics Ultraslimline Energy-Saving Tilt Tower Fan
Seville Classics
Ultraslimline Energy-Saving Tilt Tower Fan
Oscillating
5 Speeds
3 Tilt Positions
Remote Control
LED Control Panel
40"
Ozeri 3x Tower Fan
Ozeri
3x Tower Fan
Oscillating
3 Fans
3 Speeds
7.5 Hour Timer
Remote Control
LED Control Panel
44"
Lasko 52 Energy Efficient Oscillating Tower Fan
Lasko
52 Energy Efficient Oscillating Tower Fan
Oscillating
3 Speeds
Directional Louvers
7.5 Hour Timer
Adjustable Height
Remote Control
52"
Westinghouse Tower Fan with Remote
Westinghouse
Tower Fan with Remote
Oscillating
3 Speeds
8 Hour Timer
Remote Control
40"

 

Best Tower Fan

 

Soleus Air Tower Fan with Remote Control

Soleus Air Tower Fan with Remote Control

Our first pick for best tower fan oscillates in a side to side fashion.  The Soleus Air Tower Fan offers 3 fan speeds and a sleep mode speed.  These fan speeds include the following:  Regular, Natural and Simulates the Wind.

The “Simulates the Wind” fan speed will work on all three speeds, and this will produce the maximum amount of air flow.  The “Natural” speed will deliver a medium-force type of air flow, while the “Regular” speed delivers a light air flow.  And, when you set this fan to “Sleep Mode,” this will lower the fan speed to a light and quiet breeze so it won’t disturb you while you sleep.

The Soleus Air Tower Fan features an LED indicator display where you can control the settings.  Additionally, there is a remote control where you can conveniently control the settings from afar.

This oscillating tower fan offers a 7.5 hour timer, which you can set manually.  Once the time is up, this fan will automatically shutoff.  And, this is to protect the fan from overheating and prevent any unfortunate mishaps.

The Soleus Air Tower Fan measures 9.2 inches long, 11.2 inches wide and 34.47 inches tall.  It weighs roughly 8 pounds.

Pros:

This pick for best tower fan has a reduced vibration motor which makes it extremely quiet.  And, if it’s not quiet enough for you, you can always set it on sleep mode which will reduce the noise even further while you’re resting.

Furthermore, this tower fan is very stable, so you won’t have to worry about knocking it over.  And, this fan is also slim in size, so it won’t take up too much space.

Cons:

A few consumers have complained that this fan rattles.  However, it is important to note that most consumers have not reported this issue, rather they have left glowing reviews about how quiet this fan is.

 

Seville Classics Ultraslimline Energy-Saving Tilt Tower Fan

Seville Classics Ultraslimline Energy-Saving Tilt Tower Fan

Our next pick for best tower fan offers unlimited angles to get that airflow exactly where you need it.  The Seville Classics Ultraslimline Energy-Saving Tower Fan offers 55 degrees of angles with 3 different tilt positions.  These tilt positions measure at 0 degrees, 6 degrees and 12 degrees.

Furthermore, this tower fan offers 5 speeds which range from low to high.  And, it has 3 breeze settings:  Constant, Natural and Sleep.  So, when you add all of this up, you receive 45 different levels of air circulation.  And, this allows you to customize the airflow to deliver it right where you need it. 

The Seville Classics Ultraslimline Tower Fan features an LED control panel where you can control the settings.  And, if you’re across the room on your favorite chair, you can also control the settings via remote control.  Furthermore, the Seville Classics Ultraslimline Tower Fan has a 7.5 hour timer with automatic shutoff which is controlled via control panel or remote. 

This tower fan is energy-efficient and will allow you to save up to 50% in energy consumption.

Lastly, the Seville Classics Ultraslimline Tower Fan measures 13 inches long, 11 inches wide and 40 inches tall.  And, it weighs roughly 11 pounds.

Pros:

This fan has offers so many different settings, you can customize it to your exact needs.

In addition, it is quiet, and when it is on the lowest speed, it is near silent.  So, you can rest easy.

Cons:

If you’re looking to distribute air throughout a large room, this probably won’t do the trick.  This is an energy-efficient tower fan and it operates on a 25 watt motor.  Therefore, this motor can handle small to mid-sized rooms but not much larger.

 

Ozeri 3x Tower Fan

Ozeri 3x Tower Fan

This fan has a large fan base.  And, when we talk about fan base, we’re not talking about the actual fan.  We are talking about consumers.  Consumers love this fan.

The Ozeri 3x Tower Fan has 3 separately controlled fans with 3 different fan speeds.  This will give you 9 customized levels of airflow.  Furthermore, this fan offers a wide range of airflow at an oscillating 90 degrees.

Furthermore, this tower fan has 3 programs that are specially designed to help you relax and fall asleep.  And, did we mention sleep?  The Ozeri 3x Tower Fan features noise cancellation technology.  In addition, it offers canted fan blades that further help reduce blade noise.

To use this tower fan, simply control it via the touch-sensitive LED control panel or the included remote control.  And, if you would like to set the time, this fan has a 7.5 hour timer and an automatic shutoff.

Finally, this fan measures 8 inches long, 3 inches wide, 44 inches tall and it weighs 13 pounds.  Furthermore, the company claims this is among the world’s thinnest fans at mere 3 inches wide.

Pros:

Where do we begin?  This oscillating tower fan has everything.

We will start with the 3 separately controlled fans that are perfect to accommodate 3 people at once.  Especially if these 3 people never agree on which direction the wind blows.

So, you can set one fan in your direction and the other fan in your loved one’s direction.  And, you can use the 3rd fan to accommodate your pets.  Because pets need to keep cool, too.

Another notable aspect about this fan is it puts out a lot of air.  So, if you’re looking to cool down a large room, this fan is up to the task.

Cons:

Some consumers have complained this fan is rather noisy.  However, if you put it on a lower setting, that will help to reduce the noise.  And, the lowest level should be quiet enough to sleep with.  

Furthermore, the display lights on the fan are a little bright.  You may take this into consideration if you’re one of those people who like it dark when you sleep.

 

Lasko 52 Energy Efficient Oscillating Tower Fan

Lasko 52 Energy Efficient Oscillating Tower Fan

This is the tallest oscillating fan on our list.  The Lasko Energy Efficient Oscillating Tower Fan is 52 inches high, which is more than adequate for a space with taller ceilings.  Furthermore, this fan is adjustable to a height of 41 inches to accommodate a shorter space.

This pick for best tower fan has louvers which you can direct the airflow either up or down.  In addition, this fan features 3 energy-efficient speeds all adjustable via control panel or via remote control.

The Lasko 52 Energy Efficient oscillating Tower Fan has a programmable timer which you can set for up to 7.5 hours.

Finally, this tower fan measures 15 inches long, 15 inches wide and 52 inches tall.  It weighs 12 pounds and comes with a convenient handle for easy portability.

Pros:

The Lasko Oscillating Tower Fan is a great choice for a no-frills fan and it’s extremely quiet.

Furthermore, this fan is adjustable for tall or shorter spaces.  Making this a great choice for those who have a different levels of a playing field.

Cons:

While this fan works great for small to mid-sized spaces, because it is energy-efficient, it isn’t going to cool down a large space.  

 

Westinghouse Tower Fan with Remote

Westinghouse Tower Fan with Remote

Our final pick for best oscillating tower fan is another choice for those who don’t need all the frills.  The Westinghouse Tower Fan features 3 speeds with wide circulating oscillation.

This tower fan is controlled either by a digital LED display with soft-touch buttons or by remote control.  And, this tower fan offers a cubbyhole for the remote control in back.  This cubbyhole also doubles as a handle for easy portability.

The Westinghouse Tower Fan has an 8 hour timer which you can program manually.  In addition, the Westinghouse comes with a 5 foot cord so you have some leeway to move it around.

Finally, this tower fan measures 9.6 inches long, 8.3 inches wide and 36.3 inches tall.  And, it is rather lightweight at 9 pounds.

Pros:

The Westinghouse Tower Fan delivers quite a bit of air.  And, it will easily cool down a space in the mid-sized range.

Furthermore, this tower fan is rather quiet on all levels of operation.  However, if you want it extremely quiet, the lowest level of speed is where you’re going to get it.

Cons:

The blue LED lights are rather bright.  So, for sleeping purposes, you may want to consider this annoying oversight.  Or, you can always use the ever-handy duck tape to dim the light.

best karaoke machine

Best Karaoke Machine and PA Systems

If you’re looking for the best karaoke machine, clicking on this post already brought you well on your way to pop-stardom.  That’s because, these aren’t your rinky-dink karaoke machines, they are the real deal and a sure way to get the party started.  And then who knows?  Maybe a contract a contract with a major record label…  

So, what do we look for in the best karaoke machine to take your life to the next level?

First, we looked for quality karaoke machines with powerful speakers.  And, for us, these speakers have to deliver crisp and clear vocals while eliminating static and background noise.

best karaoke machine

Next, with today’s technology, bluetooth is an absolute must.  And, with bluetooth technology, the selection of music is limitless.  So, with our picks for best karaoke machine, you can create your own custom playlists or take spur-of-the-moment requests to cater to everybody who wants a chance at stardom.

Another quality we looked for in the best karaoke machine is portability.  With portability, not only are you invited to more parties, you can take your own party to a mountain top and sing your heart away.  Essentially, this means, the majority of our picks for best karaoke machine are all battery-operated and rechargeable.  For the one pick that’s not, it has its own qualities that are worth taking a look at.

And, finally, the last aspect we looked for in the best karaoke machine was fandom.  We wanted the best karaoke machine with the biggest group fans.  And, by fans, we mean very satisfied consumers.  So, our final picks have rave reviews from hundreds upon hundreds of aspiring pop stars just like you.

 

Best Karaoke Machine

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
STARQUEEN 15" Portable Outdoor Bluetooth PA Speaker System for Karaoke
STARQUEEN
15" Portable Outdoor Bluetooth PA Speaker System for Karaoke
Rechargeable
Bluetooth
Wireless Mic
Speaker
Tripod Speaker Stand
Remote Control
Guitar Jack
USB Port
LED Lights
29.5" x 18.8" x 19.5"
ION Audio Tailgater iPA77
ION
Audio Tailgater iPA77
Rechargeable
Bluetooth
Speaker
Mic
Auxiliary Input
USB Port
9.2" x 12.5" x 13"
Memorex Sing Stand 3 MKSSS Home Karaoke System
Memorex
Sing Stand 3 MKSSS Home Karaoke System
Bluetooth
2 Mics
Speakers
Auto Voice Control
Guitar Jack
59" x 12"
KaraoKing Karaoke Microphone H8 2.0
KaraoKing
Karaoke Microphone H8 2.0
Rechargeable
Bluetooth
Speaker
Mic
Audio Processor
LED Lights
11.2" x 5" x 3.7"

 

Best Karaoke Machine

STARQUEEN 15" Portable Outdoor Bluetooth PA Speaker System for Karaoke

STARQUEEN 15″ Portable Outdoor Bluetooth PA Speaker System for Karaoke

Our first pick for best karaoke machine has just about everything you can think of when it comes to singing the night away.  And, the STARQUEEN 15″ Portable Outdoor Bluetooth PA Speaker System for Karaoke is portable, so you can take it wherever the party’s at.

This karaoke machine features a speaker with a retractable luggage handle, which makes it easy to wheel around.  Furthermore, because it has a built-in rechargeable battery, you can literally take it anywhere.

The STARQUEEN Karaoke Machine comes equipped with a wireless microphone, a tripod speaker stand and a remote control.  It also features a guitar jack so you can hook up a guitar or a keyboard for those of us who are musically inclined.

Furthermore, this karaoke machine has bluetooth which easily allows you to connect to any device that comes equipped with bluetooth.  And, this will allow you to have unlimited karaoke music in the palm of your hand.  For those that don’t have a bluetooth-enabled device, there is an auxiliary input to accommodate you.

If you choose to forgo the device all together, there are a few other options to get the music pumping.  There is an FM radio, micro SD card or flash USB connection.

And, like we mentioned previously, the STARQUEEN Karaoke Machine comes with a built-in charger.  And, this charger can be charged while you use the karaoke machine.  In addition, it is advised you charge the battery for 12 hours before use.  Furthermore, in order to protect the karaoke machine, it is recommended you fully charge the battery before storing.  The total charge time is between 8 and 10 hours, while the longevity of the charge is between 4 and 5 hours.

Another additional feature this karaoke machine offers is a USB port to charge your phone, laptop or tablet.

Finally, and perhaps the icing on the cake is, the STARQUEEN Karaoke Machine comes with multi-colored LED lights.  Didn’t we tell you this karaoke machine has everything you could dream of?

Pros:

This karaoke machine delivers great vocals with a clear and crisp sound.  Furthermore, the volume is more than adequate enough to handle a party of 100 people, and perhaps even more.

The other thing we love about this karaoke machine is it easy to set up and easy to connect via bluetooth.

Cons:

There are some random complaints of defective parts.  For instance, a few consumers complained about connectivity issues.  However, it is important to note that the majority of consumers have not reported these issues.  We chalk it up as, sometimes there’s a bad apple in the mix.

ION Audio Tailgater iPA77

ION Audio Tailgater iPA77

This pick for best karaoke machine and PA system is a great budget option if you’re looking for a machine with a full-sized speaker.  The ION Audio Tailgater is very LOUD.  So, this will work great for addressing large crowds and will work great for belting out some tunes.

And, although the ION Audio Tailgater iPA77 isn’t specifically designed for karaoke, it will work just as well, if not better, than any other karaoke machine on the market.

If you’re looking to use this as a karaoke machine, you simply connect your bluetooth device for the music and lyrics.  And, this audio tailgater has separate sound for the microphone and separate sound for the speakers.  So, it’s awfully simple to use this tailgater for karaoke.

The ION Audio Tailgater iPA77 features a 2-way speaker with a 50-watt amplifier.  It comes with AM/FM radio and a 1/8″ auxiliary input.  And, it includes a microphone and an auxiliary cable.

This karaoke and PA system has a built-in rechargeable battery that allows for a whopping 50 hours of use.  So, if you want to keep the party going all night, you won’t ever need to worry about losing charge.

And finally, the ION Audio Tailgater has a USB power bank so you can charge your phone, computer or tablet.

Pros:

This karaoke and PA system connects quickly and easily to bluetooth.  And, for the price, the sound quality is clear and the volume level is outstanding. 

Furthermore, the 50-hour battery life on this system is unheard of.  You can karaoke for 2 days straight without having to recharge it.

Cons:

While some consumers say the microphone is decent, others have claimed it to be lousy.  The good news is, if you don’t care for the microphone, you can easily replace it with one that’s up to your standards.

In addition, this system doesn’t have wheels for easy portability.  However, the ION Audio Tailgater is fairly small in size, so it isn’t much of a hassle to cart around.

 

Memorex Sing Stand 3 MKSSS Home Karaoke System

Memorex Sing Stand 3 MKSSS Home Karaoke System

This pick for best karaoke machine is perfect for those who are looking to perform a duet.  The Memorex Sing Stand 3 MKSSS Home Karaoke System comes with dual microphones so you and your better half can belt out some Sonny & Cher.

This karaoke machine features an auxiliary input which allows you to plug in a guitar or a keyboard.  And, this auxiliary input is additional to the 2 auxiliary inputs for the microphone.  So, if you’re looking to sing and play the guitar while another plays the keyboard, you have a lot of leeway with this machine.

The Memorex Sing Stand 3 Home Karaoke System has 2 5-watt built-in speakers at the base of the microphone stand.  In addition, this karaoke machine is bluetooth friendly.  So, just connect a bluetooth device and you can feed music right through these speakers.  However, if you want to forgo the bluetooth, there is a universal line-in where you can connect just about any device to play some music.

The Memorex Sing Stand 3 Home Karaoke System offers a cradle for the microphone and a holder for your phone or tablet.  This holder enables you to read lyrics easily and conveniently.

And, there’s a master volume for the music and volumes for each individual mic.  So, you can customize this karaoke machine to your needs. 

Lastly, this karaoke machine is 59 inches tall when the mic stand is fully extended.  And, the base measures 12 inches in diameter.

Pros:

If you’re looking for a no-frills karaoke machine with a stage-presence feel, this is a great pick for you.  And, it works great for at-home use.  Not so much for large parties though.

Cons:

Because the speakers are only 5-watts apiece, it isn’t going to deliver the greatest quality of sound.  However, the quality of sound is adequate for casual use.  If you’re looking for high quality sound with a significant amount of volume output, you may want to go with one of the picks above.

 

KaraoKing Karaoke Microphone H8 2.0

KaraoKing Karaoke Microphone H8 2.0

Our final pick for best karaoke machine is another great one for at-home use or a small gathering.  And, it takes up very little space, so it is easily stored and highly portable.

The KaraoKing Karaoke Microphone H8 2.0 comes with a built-in 5-watt speaker which contains a metal filter for noise reduction.  In addition, it has an audio processor in order to fine tune the output.  And, this karaoke machine comes with an intelligent mixing chip which will automatically fine tune the music for you.

This karaoke machine comes with a rechargeable 2200 mAh battery which can last for up to 8 hours of non-stop karaoke-ing.  Furthermore, in order to begin, just connect your phone, tablet or computer via bluetooth and you’re on your way to belting your heart out.

And, if you choose to use your phone for the karaoke music, the KaraoKing Karaoke Microphone H8 2.0 comes with a smartphone holder that attaches to the mic for easy and convenient lyrics.

This karaoke machine comes with 48 multi-colored LED lights for the ultimate show.  And, if you want to take your show on the road, it also comes with a convenient travel bag.  Did we say travel?  Yes, you can take this along for a car ride.

Pros:

This is as compact as you’re going to get.  It’s convenient, easy to use and highly portable.

Furthermore, the volume on this karaoke machine can get pretty loud.  However, not so loud that you will be waking the neighbors up.

Cons:

There’s not really many cons to this karaoke machine.  If anything, it may not get as loud as you want.  But, if you have teenagers belting out lyrics, you may not even want it all that loud.

 

best fireplace grate

Best Fireplace Grate – Cast Iron and Steel

Are you looking for the best fireplace grate?  Fireplace grates are an absolute necessity for every fireplace.  Not only do they keep the firewood in place, but they also help to increase airflow.

And, this is important because you want to maximize your wood-burning experience.  When you use a grate, it will increase the burn-time of the firewood, increase the heat output and produce a cleaner burning fire.

So, what should you look for in the best fireplace grate?  Well, first, material is important.  And, the best materials for a fireplace grate are steel and cast iron.

best fireplace grate

And that poses the next question, which is better?  Steel or cast iron?  According to DenGarden, steel fireplace grates are less efficient and generally do not last as long as cast iron.  However, if you choose a steel fireplace grate in a heavier-grade, it can last as long as cast iron.

Furthermore, stainless steel fireplace grates are typically used for wood only.  The bars of the grate are spread apart wider, and therefore, they are not able to accommodate coal.  So, if you’re looking to build a fire with coal, a cast iron fireplace grate is the best way to go.  This is because most cast iron grates have small divides which can accommodate coal without the coal falling through the gaps.

Another quality you should look for in the best fireplace grate is weight.  The heavier the grate, the better off you will be in the long run.  Heavy grates tend to be more durable and more fire retardant.  So, if you choose a fireplace grate above 20 pounds, it is going to last you a while.  And, the heavier the grate you choose, the more years of use you can tack on.

Furthermore, it is important to note that fireplace grates come in all sizes.  So, in this case, if you’re going with a small fireplace grate, a weight of 17 pounds is still going to be a medium-duty grate and will be durable enough for years to come.  But, if you’re an everyday fire starter, we do suggest going with a heavier weight than that.    

Finally, if you’re looking for some fireplace tools to go along with your fireplace grate, check out our picks for top fireplace tools here

   

Best Fireplace Grate

 MaterialSpecsPrice
Grate Wall of Fire Model M-6 High Efficiency Smoke-Free Fireplace Grate
Grate Wall of Fire
Model M-6 High Efficiency Smoke-Free Fireplace Grate
Steel
Cast Iron Finials
26" x 15"
Liberty Foundry HY-C G500-24 Sampson Series Cast Iron Fireplace Grate
Liberty Foundry
HY-C G500-24 Sampson Series Cast Iron Fireplace Grate
Cast Iron20" x 16"
24" x 16"
18" x 16"
20" x 20"
20" x 14"
Heritage Products Heavy Duty Steel Fireplace Grate
Heritage Products
Heavy Duty Steel Fireplace Grate
Steel18" x 14"
24" x 14"
27" x 14"
33" x 14"
36" x 14"
Amagabeli Black Wrought Iron Fireplace Log Grate
Amagabeli
Black Wrought Iron Fireplace Log Grate
Cast Iron22" x 11"
24" x 11"
Liberty Foundry HY-C G22-4 G-Series Franklin Style Cast Iron Fireplace Grate
Liberty Foundry
HY-C G22-4 G-Series Franklin Style Cast Iron Fireplace Grate
Cast Iron17" x 12" x 6.7"
22" x 12" x 5"
22" x 12" x 6.5"
27" x 12" x 6.5"
Uniflame Hexagonal Fireplace Grate
Uniflame
Hexagonal Fireplace Grate
Steel24" x 24"
27" x 27"
30" x 30"
36" x 36"

 

Best Fireplace Grate

Grate Wall of Fire Model M-6 High Efficiency Smoke-Free Fireplace Grate

Grate Wall of Fire Model M-6 High Efficiency Smoke-Free Fireplace Grate

Our first pick for best fireplace grate is a high-efficiency option that increases heat output.  The Grate Wall of Fire Model M-6 High Efficiency Smoke-Free Fireplace Grate not only increases heat output, it eliminates smoke output inside the home.

This fireplace grate works by resting on the rear wall of the fireplace.  Simply place the wood between the wall and the grate and you will have a clean burning fire in no time.

The Grate Wall of Fire High Efficiency Fireplace Grate is made with heavy-duty steel construction and comes with decorative cast iron finials which are removable in case the design doesn’t match your decor.  And, the steel constructed bars are .75 inches of solid steel.  

This fireplace grate measures 26 inches wide, 14 inches deep and 15 inches tall.  Therefore, the back wall of your fireplace needs to measure at least 26 inches wide and the depth of the fireplace should be at least 16 inches deep.  Furthermore, the entry to the fireplace should have enough depth so you’re able to load the firewood.

Pros:

The Grate Wall of Fire High Efficiency Fireplace Grate gets absolute rave reviews.  The most appreciated aspect of this fireplace grate is the amount of heat it delivers.  It will deliver a lot of heat in a short amount of time, which is perfect for those cold winter nights.

In addition, this fireplace grate eliminates smoke from coming into the house.  And, for those of us that have that issue, this fireplace grate is a lifesaver.

Cons:

Because this fireplace grate leans up against the back of the fireplace, it can cause brick and mortar failure overtime.  The solution to this is, The Grate Wall of Fire offers a reflective fireback to protect the wall from heat damage.  This fireback not only protects the rear of the fireplace, it is reflective, so therefore, it will reflect heat back into the room.  And, just like that, this fireplace grate just became even more efficient.  You can find the reflective fireback here.

Liberty Foundry HY-C G500-24 Sampson Series Cast Iron Fireplace Grate

Liberty Foundry HY-C G500-24 Sampson Series Cast Iron Fireplace Grate

This next pick for best fireplace grate is another high-efficiency option.  The Liberty Foundry HY-C G500-24 Sampson Series Cast Iron Fireplace Grate is designed in a way which allows you to combine wood with coal and receive air from all angles.  And, this allows the fire to burn cleanly while increasing the heat output.

This fireplace grate is made with heavy-duty cast iron and features removable 2.5 inch tall legs.  However, if you need to remove them for more clearance, this fireplace grate is extremely stable on its own.

Lastly, the Liberty Foundry Cast Iron Fireplace Grate comes in your choice of 5 different sizes:  20 inches by 16 inches, 24 inches by 16 inches, 18 inches by 16 inches, 20 inches by 20 inches or 20 inches by 14 inches.

Pros:

First of all, this fireplace grate is extremely attractive.  Most consumers can’t get enough of how well this fireplace grate presents itself.

Furthermore, this grate is made of solid cast iron and is extremely sturdy.  So, if you’re going to burn coal, this grate is up the challenge.  If you just want to burn wood, this is a great alternative to some of the steel fireplace grates which are designed in this same classic fashion.

Cons:

A few consumers felt the assembly is difficult and the instructions are hard to understand.  Patience is advised.

Heritage Products Heavy Duty Steel Fireplace Grate

Heritage Products Heavy Duty Steel Fireplace Grate

This next pick is designed to use for wood only.  The Heritage Products Heavy Duty Steel Fireplace Grate features a wide construction with wide-set bars.

This fireplace grate is made with heavy-duty steel construction with .375 inches by 1 inch thick bars.  And, having bars this thick, you won’t have to worry about warping.  

The Heritage Products Heavy Duty Steel Fireplace Grate is tapered to ensure it fits most fireplaces.  And, for added assurance on getting the right fit, this fireplace grate comes in your choice of sizes:  18 inches by 14 inches, 24 inches by 14 inches, 27 inches by 14 inches, 33 inches by 14 inches and 36 inches by 14 inches.

Pros:

This fireplace grate is heavy and durable.  And, when it comes to heavy-duty steel, this grate will last you a long time.

Furthermore, it comes in an array of sizes, enough to accommodate just about every fireplace out there.

Cons:

Every once in a while we review a product where we can find no defect.  And, as much as we tried to pick this fireplace grate apart, we couldn’t find one thing wrong with it.

 

Amagabeli Black Wrought Iron Fireplace Log Grate

Amagabeli Black Wrought Iron Fireplace Log Grate

This pick for best fireplace grate is designed to be used for wood only.  And, this grate is made with wrought iron, as opposed to cast iron.  So, it’s not going to be as durable as cast iron, but it is made with thick construction and will handle a lot of heat.

The Amagabeli Black Wrought Iron Fireplace Log Grate features 7 steel bars within a v-shaped rack.  This rack is processed with electroforged grating which seals up cracks, increasing durability.

This fireplace grate comes in your choice of 2 sizes:  22 inches long and 11.25 inches wide or 24 inches long and 7.5 inches wide.  Both sizes are a good weight at approximately 20 pounds.

Pros:

The Amagabeli Black Wrought Iron Fireplace Log Grate is heavy-duty and durable enough to handle an outdoor firepit.

Furthermore, it features a classic design and will blend well in just about any room or in any yard.

Cons:

Because it is made of wrought iron as opposed to cast iron, this may not be durable for an everyday fire starter.  It would last you a while, but probably not as long as a cast iron fireplace grate would.

Liberty Foundry HY-C G22-4 G-Series Franklin Style Cast Iron Fireplace Grate

Liberty Foundry HY-C G22-4 G-Series Franklin Style Cast Iron Fireplace Grate

The best aspect of this fireplace grate is it’s all one piece.  The Liberty Foundry Franklin Style Fireplace Grate is made with one solid piece of cast iron and sits on 4-inch cast-on legs.

And, this grate can burn both coal and wood because it is made of cast iron and designed with smaller gaps. 

The Liberty Foundry Franklin Style Fireplace Grate measures 12 inches deep and is designed for smaller fireplaces. It comes in your choice of lengths:  17 inches, 22 inches or 27 inches.

Pros:

Because this fireplace grate is made with heavy-duty cast iron, it is going to last through a lot of fires.

Additionally, this is a perfect size for smaller-sized fireplaces and works also great for an outdoor firepit.

Cons:

The legs on the Liberty Foundry Fireplace Grate are rather short, which is great for low-ceiling fireplaces.  However, because the legs are short, it doesn’t get as much airflow underneath and the coal accumulation can suffer because of it.

Uniflame Hexagonal Fireplace Grate

Uniflame Hexagonal Fireplace Grate

Our final pick for best fireplace grate is designed for wider fireplaces.  In addition, it is also designed in a hexagon shape for maximum airflow.

The Uniflame Hexagonal Fireplace Grate is constructed with 100% stainless steel with a black finish.  And, because it is stainless steel with wide set bars, this fireplace grate is for wood only.

The Uniflame Hexagonal Fireplace Grate comes in your choice of 4 different sizes:  24 inches by 24 inches, 27 inches by 27 inches, 30 inches by 30 inches and 36 inches by 36 inches.

Pros:

This fireplace grate is solidly built and extremely durable.

Additionally, the hexagon design is a brilliant feature because it allows for a whole lot of airflow.  And, this means more efficient burning time.

Cons:

The legs of the Uniflame Hexagonal Fireplace are rather short.  So, this deters some coal buildup which tends to extend the life of the fire.

Furthermore, this fireplace grate is not designed for outdoor use.

Best Fireplace Tools and Wrought Iron Sets

When searching for the best fireplace tools, it’s best to start with your fireplace in mind.  Or rather, the whole setup you have going on.

From a design standpoint, choosing the right fireplace tools to match your fireplace screen and your grate, as well as your room decor, is imperative to keeping the aesthetic of a room with a fireplace view.  So, if you have sleek lines going on and a contemporary set up, you will want to choose a modern set of fireplace tools.  If you have a log cabin-esque atmosphere going on, or perhaps some country decor, you will want to go for a more traditional-style of fireplace tools.

best fireplace tools

The next step to picking out the best fireplace tools is durability.  You will be handling hot coals and firewood with theses tools, so whatever you choose needs to be able to take a beating and a burning.  And, our 6 picks for best fireplace tools are more than up for this task as they are all made of heavy wrought iron or heavy-duty metal.  So, we’ve made this part of the process of choosing the best fireplace tools easy for you.  

Additionally, fireplace tools should be comfortable to hold.  So, with a selection of fireplace tools featuring ergonomic handles or smooth rectangular-shaped handles, you will be comfortably poking the fire without the onset of hand fatigue.

And, of course, the best fireplace tools need to have a happy consumers.  Therefore, we only chose the highest quality fireplace tools with the best consumer reviews.  So, our final picks for best fireplace tools, are tried and true and occupy happy homes.

Lastly, if you’re looking for a fireplace grate to go with a set of fireplace tools, you can find our top picks and a perfect match here.

 

Best Fireplace Tools

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Plow & Hearth 36164-Brz 5 Piece
Plow & Hearth
36164-Brz 5 Piece
Wrought Iron
4 Tools
Hand-Forged Finish
Color Options
32.5" x 7.5"
20" x 10.2"
Panacea Fireplace Tool Set 5 Piece
Panacea
Fireplace Tool Set 5 Piece
Metal
4 Tools
Soft-Mottled Gray Finish
31" x 10.9"
Pilgrim Home and Hearth 18086 Sinclair Tool Set
Pilgrim Home and Hearth
18086 Sinclair Tool Set
Metal
4 Tools
Burnished Brass Finish
29" x 10"
Minuteman International Shepherd's Hook III Fireplace Tool Set
Minuteman International
Shepherd's Hook III Fireplace Tool Set
Wrought Iron
4 Tools
Black Powder-Coated Finish
22" x 7"
26.5" x 6"
33" x 8"
38" x 10.25"
Uniflame 5 Piece Black Wrought Iron Ring Swirl Fireset
Uniflame
5 Piece Black Wrought Iron Ring Swirl Fireset
Wrought Iron
4 Tools
Black Finish
31" x 12"
Amagabelli Rustic Fireplace Tools 5 Piece
Amagabelli
Rustic Fireplace Tools 5 Piece
Wrought Iron
4 Tools
31" x 7.1"

 

Best Fireplace Tools

Plow & Hearth 36164-Brz 5 Piece

Plow & Hearth 36164-Brz 5 Piece

Our first pick for best fireplace tools is designed in a shepherd’s crook style.  And, this is derived from a tool used by shepherd’s to keep predators from their flock.  So, this set works well in a country or cabin-esque type of atmosphere.  And, with the simplicity of this particular design, this set can also work well in a modern environment.

The Plow & Hearth 36164-Brz 5 Piece Fireplace Tool Set is made of wrought iron and features grooved beaver tail ends.  In addition, this set is hand forged with a natural bronze finish or you have the option of choosing a black finish.

This set of fireplace tools measures 32.5 inches tall, 7.5 inches wide and it weighs roughly 16 pounds.  But, if you would like a more compact set, you can find that here.  The Plow & Hearth Compact Fireplace Tool Set measures 20 inches tall and 10.2 inches wide.  And, it weighs roughly 10 pounds.

Lastly, this set comes with 4 tools and a stand.  The tools include tongs, poker, shovel and a broom.

Pros:

The Plow & Hearth 36164-Brz 5 Piece Fireplace Tool Set features a minimal, yet classic, design that will work well with just about every decor.

Furthermore, this set is made of solid wrought iron and is more than durable enough to endure the abuse we put our fireplace tools through.  In addition, it’s durable enough to handle outdoor fires.

Cons:

There was a complaint that the brush is a little on the cheap side.  However, it is important to note, the overwhelming majority of consumers are very happy with this set of fireplace tools.

Panacea Fireplace Tool Set 5 Piece

Panacea Fireplace Tool Set 5 Piece

This set of fireplace tools boasts a modern prairie-style that will work well with contemporary decor.

The Panacea Fireplace Tool Set 5 Piece is made of heavy-duty metal with a soft-mottled gray finish.  This soft-mottled gray finish can be best described as a steel gray color.

This fireplace tool set features a rectangular frame with 4 tools.  These tools include a poker, shovel, tongs and a broom.  Furthermore, these tools come with thick, rectangular handles that are smooth to the touch.

Lastly, the Panacea Fireplace Tools Set 5 Piece measures 31 inches tall and 10.9 inches wide.  And, it weighs roughly 16 pounds.

Pros:

This fireplace set is well-built and sturdy.

Additionally, the handles are welded onto the metal shafts as opposed to screwed on, making this feature a feature which exudes quality.

Cons:

The handles are comfortable, yet rectangular.  However, they aren’t ergonomically designed which is for the preferred level of comfort.

Pilgrim Home and Hearth 18086 Sinclair Tool Set

Pilgrim Home and Hearth 18086 Sinclair Tool Set

This pick for best fireplace tools has a traditional shepherd’s hook design.  However, this particular design works well with both classic and modern decor.

The Pilgrim Home and Hearth 18086 Sinclair Tool Set is constructed of heavy-duty metal and hand-forged with a Burnished Brass finish.

This fireplace tool set features a rectangular stand with 4 tools.  These tools include a shovel, poker, tongs and a brush.

Furthermore, the Pilgrim Home and Hearth 18086 Sinclair Tool Set measures 29 inches tall and 10 inches wide.  And, it weighs 20 pounds.

Pros:

This company is well-known for making high quality products for over 65 years.  And, this fireplace tool set tells of a similar story – it is extremely durable, well-designed and well-crafted.

In addition, the handles and the stems are all one piece, which attests to the craftsmanship and the construction.

Cons:

The Pilgrim Home and Hearth 18086 Sinclair Tool Set may be a bit pricier than some of our other picks.  However, due to the quality and construction, this set is worth every penny.

 

Minuteman International Shepherd's Hook III Fireplace Tool Set

Minuteman International Shepherd’s Hook III Fireplace Tool Set

This next pick is a traditional-style fireplace set with a shepherd’s hook design.  And, this particular set works best in a country or cabin environment.

The Minuteman International Shepherd’s Hook III Fireplace Tool Set is made of forged wrought iron with a black powder-coated finish.

This fireplace set comes with a stand with 4 different tools.  These tools include a poker, shovel, hoe and a brush.

The Minuteman International Shepherd’s Hook III Tool Set comes with a base ranging from 6 inches to 10.25 inches wide and comes in 4 different heights to choose from:  22 inches, 26 inches, 33 inches and 38 inches.

Pros:

This set is offered in 4 different heights which is sure to accommodate just about every consumer.

Furthermore, this fireplace set is made of solid wrought iron and extremely durable.  For assurance, the 38 inch fireplace tool set weighs a whopping 30 pounds.

Cons:

Some consumers have complained the broom is losing some bristles.  Unfortunately, this is often the case with this type of broom.  But, losing some bristles may give it some authenticity.

 

Uniflame 5 Piece Black Wrought Iron Ring Swirl Fireset

Uniflame 5 Piece Black Wrought Iron Ring Swirl Fireset

This set of fireplace tools is a traditional shepherd’s hook design with a continuous loop handle.  And, this set will work best with traditional decor.  Furthermore, the handles and the stand are twisted to give it an added flair.

The Uniflame 5 Piece Black Wrought Iron Ring Swirl Fireset is made of heavy wrought iron with a black finish.

This fireplace set comes with a stand and 4 different tools.  These tools include a shovel, log lifter, poker and a brush.

The Uniflame 5 Piece Black Wrought Iron Ring Swirl Fireset weighs 19 pounds and measures 31 inches tall and 12 inches wide.

Pros:

This fireplace set is heavy-duty and on the budget friendly side.  Plus, it is made with wrought iron so you know it’s going to be durable.  Additionally, the twisted design feature gives it some extra-added durability.  

Cons:

The broom isn’t all that functional.  It can work but not all that well.  Best to keep it for looks and have another one on hand for clean up.

Amagabelli Rustic Fireplace Tools 5 Piece

Amagabelli Rustic Fireplace Tools 5 Piece

Our final pick for best fireplace tool set features a classic design that will work well with traditional decor.  And, with the knob design on the handle, this is one of the more comfortable picks on our list.

The Amagabelli Rustic Fireplace Tools 5 Piece is made of black wrought iron.  It comes with a base and 4 tools to choose from:  brush, shovel, tongs and fireplace poker.

This fireplace set measures 31 inches tall and 7.1 inches wide.  It weighs roughly 11 pounds.

Lastly, the Amagabelli Rustic Fireplace Tools 5 Piece needs to be assembled upon arrival.  However, this set comes with a simple guide and assembly is extremely easy.  The total setup should take no more than 5 minutes.

Pros:

This fireplace tool set is easy to assemble.  And, once screwed in, most consumers had no issues with the parts unscrewing over time.

Additionally, this set has ergonomic designed handles which makes it comfortable to handle and eliminates hand fatigue. 

Cons:

Because it’s a budget option, you’re not going to have the heavy-duty quality of some of the other fireplace tool sets on the market.  For instance, this set only weighs roughly 11 pounds, whereas, most of our other picks weigh between 20 and 30 pounds.

Furthermore, some consumers have complained that the pieces weren’t threaded for screw-in and these consumers were not able to assemble the set.  Additionally, there were also some consumers that had issues with the parts staying screwed in over time.

Overall, this is a decent set for the price.  And, it’s the best fireplace tool set in this particular price range.  However, if you’re looking for a heavy-duty option that’s going to last years to come, we suggest going with one of our other picks.  You may be paying more, but in the long run, it’s worth it.

Best Insulated Lunchbox Cooler

Best Insulated Lunchbox Cooler

Are you looking for the best insulated lunchbox cooler?  Or perhaps you’re thinking about investing in a lunchbox cooler and have no idea what to look for?  Well, that’s where we come in.

First, we created a quick and easy guide toward purchasing the best lunchbox cooler to keep your food deliciously fresh throughout the day.  Then, we searched high and low for the best lunchbox cooler to do just that.  In the end, we found 5 of the top thermal coolers to keep your food and beverages just the way you like them – refreshingly cool.

But first, take a peek at our Buyer’s Guide below to familiarize yourself with some of the qualities you can find in our picks for the best lunchbox cooler.  Or, if you know what you want, skip down to our list to start shopping.

Best Insulated Lunchbox Cooler Buyer’s Guide

What should I be looking for in a lunchbox cooler?

In order to find the best insulated lunchbox cooler for you, it’s best to determine your main purpose for this cooler.  Will you be taking it to and from work?  Or, will you be taking it along with you for a day at the beach?

If you will be taking it to and from work and all you really need is a quality insulated lunchbox cooler to keep your food cold for a few hours, our picks below will suit your needs perfectly.

However, if you’re looking for a lunchbox cooler for day trips and need to keep your food cold for 12 hours or more, you may want to check out our list for Best Soft Cooler.  These coolers are extremely high-performing, with enough room and stamina to keep your hunger satisfied all day long – and even for a few days.

So, after you have determined what you will be using this insulated lunchbox cooler for, the next step is to find the cooler that is going to match your needs.  Do you need a lunchbox cooler to keep cold foods cold and hot foods hot?  What about extra pockets to separate particular food items?  Do you need a portion control cooler to help you lose weight?  Or, how about a cooler that comes equipped with a thermos?

If you answered yes to any of these questions, we have a little bit of everything on our list below.  All you have to do is find the one that best matches your needs and you’re on your way to fabulous luncheon with a brand new insulated lunchbox cooler.

 

Best Insulated Lunchbox Cooler

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Under Armour 12 Can Soft Sided Cooler
Under Armour
12 Can Soft Sided Cooler
420D Polyester
Pockets
Shoulder Strap
Color Options
7" x 9" x 7"
10" x 12" x 11"
Vaya Tyffyn Insulated Lunch Box
Vaya Tyffyn
Insulated Lunch Box
Stainless Steel
BPA-Free Plastic
Hot/Cold
Food Containers
Color Options
6.3" x 4.5" x 5.1"
6.2" x 9" x 7.7"
MOJECTO Large Cooler Bag
MOJECTO
Large Cooler Bag
840D Polyester
Pockets
Shoulder Strap
Color Options
12" x 19" x 15"
Burton Lil Buddy
Burton
Lil Buddy
Polyester
Pockets
Shoulder Strap
Bottle Opener
Color Options
19" x 18" x 6"
Homiry Thermal Insulated Lunch Bag Bento Box
Homiry
Thermal Insulated Lunch Bag Bento Box
Polyester
BPA-Free Plastic
Protein Bottle
6 Food Containers
Ice Pack
Vitamin Supplement Case
7" x 6" x 7"

 

Best Insulated Lunchbox Cooler

Under Armour 12 Can Soft Sided Cooler

Under Armour 12 Can Soft Sided Cooler

Our first pick for best insulated lunchbox cooler comes in your choice of a 12 can size (7″ x 9″ x 7″) or a 24 can size (10″ x 12″ x 11″.)  And, although this cooler is measured in cans, The Under Armour Soft Sided Cooler is great for transporting beverages and food.

This lunchbox cooler can keep food and drinks cold for up to 12 hours, sometimes more, with the proper ice packs.  And, if you need an icepack, you can find the best here.

The Under Armour Soft Sided Cooler keeps things cold with ISOTEC premium, closed-cell PE foam insulation.  ISOTEC is one of the leading manufacturers of advanced thermal insulation with over 100 years experience.  And, according to Wise Geek, PE foam insulation aka polyethylene is an oderless, recyclable, lightweight thermoplastic.

Furthermore, this soft cooler is constructed of 420D polyester and comes lined with a FLEX-A-GUARD liner.  And, this liner is easy to clean and it’s also hygienic.

The Under Armour Soft Sided Cooler comes with an array of zippered pockets to keep food and drinks organized.  In addition, you can use these pockets for other items such as a phone, keys, wallet, etc.

This soft cooler is easy to transport.  It features a comfortable, rubber handle and an adjustable shoulder strap.

Finally, the Under Armour Soft Sided Cooler comes in your choice of the following colors:  Blaze Orange, Graphite, Hyper Green, Team Royal and Black/Red.

Pros:

The 12 can and 24 can size options are the perfect size to accommodate every type of person.  And, this cooler makes great use of its space.  We also love the additional pockets for our snacks.

Furthermore, with an icepack, this cooler stays cool for a long time.  

Cons:

The zipper is lacking in the quality department.  It feels cheap and some consumers have complained that it tends to get stuck.

Vaya Tyffyn Insulated Lunch Box

Vaya Tyffyn Insulated Lunch Box

We had to throw in this lunchbox.  Not only because it’s a modern take on the decades-old lunch pail, but because it is incredibly innovative.

The Vaya Tyffyn Insulated Lunch Box will keep cold foods cold and hot foods hot for up to 5 hours.  It is vacuum-insulated and the company claims it is the most advanced thermally insulated lunchbox in the world.

This insulated lunchbox comes with two inner containers which can separately hold 4 different food varieties.  Each container is made with stainless steel on the inside and a copper-finish on the outside.  And, they come with BPA-free, leak-resistant lids.

Lastly, the Vaya Tyffyn Insulated lunchbox comes in your choice of colors and designs:  Black, Cheetah, Dew, Graphite, Maple, Wool, Denim and Gold.  In addition, they come in your choice of sizes:  600 ml or 1000 ml.  If you go with the 1000 ml size, this lunchbox comes with a total of 3 inner containers as opposed to 2.  

Pros:

This insulated lunchbox cooler does a great job with keeping food at the right temperature.  And, some consumers claim it can maintain its temperature for 6 hours.

Cons:

There have been reports of the copper-finish peeling off.  The good news is, this copper-finish is not in contact with the food, but rather on the outside of the food containers.

In addition, some consumers found the 600 ml size to be rather small.  However, the 1000 ml is a decent size.

Mojecto Large Cooler Bag

MOJECTO Large Cooler Bag

This pick for best insulated lunchbox cooler offers 2 insulated compartments.  The MOJECTO Large Cooler Bag has a top insulated compartment with a zippered mesh pocket and a large bottom insulated compartment.  In addition, it comes with 3 outer pockets that are perfect for snacks, flatware or even personal item such as keys, wallet or phone.

This insulated lunchbox cooler is constructed of 840D polyester and high-density thick foam insulation.  And, according to Quality Logo Products, 840d is a measurement of mass density which determines its strength and durability.  In this case, 840d is an extremely durable measurement.

Furthermore, this cooler lunchbox features heavy-duty stitching and durable double zippers.  And, it comes with 2 replaceable heat-sealed PEVA liners which is used for insulation.

The MOJECTO Large Cooler Bag offers 2 easy-grip handles and an adjustable shoulder strap for transportation.

Finally, this insulated cooler bag comes in your choice of colors:  Black, Blue or Purple.  And, it measures 12 inches long, 19 inches wide and 15 inches tall.

Pros:

The MOJECTO Large Cooler Bag is very well constructed and the heavy-duty zippers are virtually indestructible.

Furthermore, this lunch box cooler is roomy and the extra pockets make it easy to transport your personal items such as keys, wallet and phone.

Cons:

This lunch box isn’t designed to put ice in it.  However, a quality icepack will work fine.

Burton Lil Buddy

Burton Lil Buddy

This is a great pick if you want something more casual.  The Burton Lil Buddy works well for the beach, for school or for a picnic.

This insulated lunch box cooler is made of high-quality polyester and is large enough to fit a 12-pack.  It measures 19 inches long, 18 inches wide and 6 inches tall.

And, the good new is, the Burton Lil Buddy can accommodate just plain ice without having to worry about leaks or the bag sweating. So, if you choose to forgo an ice pack, just dump some ice in the bag and you’re ready to go.

This pick for best insulated lunch box cooler comes with a comfortable, removable shoulder strap and a bottle opener.  Furthermore, it has multiple pockets to carry your necessities, like your phone, sunglasses and keys.

Finally, the Burton Lil Buddy comes in 10 different color combinations and design options:  Golden Haze, Mountaineer Tye Dye Print, Das Cuda, Day Tripper Print, Famish Stripes, Fish Blanket, Indigo Print, Safari, Sinola Print and Tropical Print.

Pros:

This bag is well-versed and can be used as a lunch box for work and a lunch box for the slopes.

Furthermore, it can handle just plain ice without having to worry about leaks. 

Cons:

There’s really not many negative things to say about this cooler.  If anything, we wish they had the option of a solid color.

Homiry Thermal Insulated Lunch Bag Bento Box

best mixing bowls

Best Mixing Bowls – Stainless Steel & Plastic

If you’re looking for the best mixing bowls, we searched high and low for the best all-around mixing bowls on the market.  And, if you are specifically looking for stainless steel mixing bowls, you’re in luck.  We found 6 high quality stainless steel mixing bowls that surely compliment your kitchen.

If you’re looking for plastic mixing bowls, we found one set that is extremely durable and BPA free.  It is also a consumer favorite.

And, if you’re not sure if you should go with a stainless steel set or a plastic set, we have a small guide to help you sort out the differences.

Best Mixing Bowls Buyer’s Guide

Should I go with a stainless steel or plastic set of mixing bowls?

Both of these options are lightweight and durable.  However, there is one big distinction between the two.

According to FOOD52, plastic tends to absorb odors and oil.  Additionally, plastic is prone to stains.  Especially if you will be prepping with beets, blueberries, tomato sauce and the like.  

And then, the other difference is the texture.  Some people may prefer plastic over stainless steel because sometimes stainless steel can feel like fingernails on a chalkboard.  Of course, not everyone feels this way but there are people that do.  So, be sure to take this into consideration because cooking and baking should be enjoyable.

In the end, whatever you choose to go is most likely personal preference.  And, like we mentioned previously, our pick for the best plastic mixing bowls is BPA free.  So, you’re not going to be mixing any harmful chemicals in with the chocolate chip cookies.

 

Best Mixing Bowls

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
All-Clad MBSET Stainless Steel Dishwasher Safe Mixing Bowls
All-Clad
MBSET Stainless Steel Dishwasher Safe Mixing Bowls
18/10 Stainless Steel
Non-Slip Handles
Drip-Free Rim
Dishwasher Safe
1.5 Quart
3 Quart
5 Quart
KitchenAid 3-Piece Stainless Steel Mixing Bowl Set
KitchenAid
3-Piece Stainless Steel Mixing Bowl Set
18/8 Stainless Steel
Non-Slip Handles
Non-Slip Base
Dishwasher Safe
3 Quart
5 Quart
15 Quart
The Pampered Chef Stainless Steel Mixing Bowl Set of 3
The Pampered Chef
Stainless Steel Mixing Bowl Set of 3
Brushed Stainless Steel
Silicone Thumb Hole
Silicone Base
Pour Spout
Metric Measurements
Dishwasher Safe
2 Quart
4 Quart
6 Quart
OXO Good Grips 3-Piece Stainless-Steel Mixing Bowl Set
OXO Good Grips
3-Piece Stainless-Steel Mixing Bowl Set
Brushed Stainless Steel
Plastic Exterior
Non-Slip Base
Dishwasher Safe
1.5 Quart
3 Quart
5 Quart
KUKPO Mixing Bowls
KUKPO
Mixing Bowls
BPA-Free Plastic
Non-Slip Handles
Non-Slip Base
Pour Spout
Dishwasher Safe
1.8 Quart
3.6 Quart
6.5 Quart
Bellemain Stainless Steel Non-Slip Mixing Bowls with Lids
Bellemain
Stainless Steel Non-Slip Mixing Bowls with Lids
18/10 Stainless Steel
BPA-Free Silicone Lids
Silicone Base
Metric Measurements
Dishwasher Safe
1 Quart
1.5 Quart
3 Quart
5 Quart
FINEDINE Stainless Steel Mixing Bowls
FINEDINE
Stainless Steel Mixing Bowls
Stainless Steel
Dishwasher Safe
.75 Quart
1 Quart
1.5 Quart
3 Quart
4 Quart
5 Quart
8 Quart

 

Best Mixing Bowls

All-Clad MBSET Stainless Steel Dishwasher Safe Mixing Bowls

All-Clad MBSET Stainless Steel Dishwasher Safe Mixing Bowls

Our first pick for best stainless steel mixing bowls is one of the most exquisite sets available.  The All-Clad MBSET Stainless Steel Dishwasher Safe Mixing Bowls comes from a company that has been around for nearly 5 decades and produces cookware with American-made steel.

This set of stainless steel mixing bowls are made with high quality 18/10 steel, also known as 304 grade stainless steel.  And, according to Mightynest, 18/10 stainless steel is made of 18% chromium and 10% nickel.  It is durable, corrosion resistant and safeguards against chemical transfer.

The All-Clad MBSET Stainless Steel Mixing Bowls are stackable and come with a 1.5 quart, 3 quart and 5 quart capacity mixing bowls.  And, all together, they weigh 7 pounds.

These stainless steel mixing bowls feature a rolled rim for drip-free pours.  In addition, they come with handles for an easy grip.

Finally, this set of mixing bowls is dishwasher safe.

Pros:

This company makes high quality stainless steel cookware and these mixing bowls are no different.  Furthermore, the handles offer a superb grip and the drip-free edges are a thoughtful bonus.  

Cons:

Some consumers have complained these mixing bowls are on the small side.  Additionally, since they are stainless steel, they will scratch.

KitchenAid 3-Piece Stainless Steel Mixing Bowl Set

KitchenAid 3-Piece Stainless Steel Mixing Bowl Set

This next pick for best mixing bowls is made of heavy gauge, 18/8 stainless steel.  The KitchenAid 3-Piece Stainless Steel Mixing Bowl Set is durable, rust-resistant and corrosion-resistant.

These stainless steel mixing bowls set are a nesting-style set which comes with a 3 quart, 5 quart and 15 quart bowl.

The KitchenAid 3-Piece Stainless Steel Mixing Bowl Set features seemless handles which provide a slip-free grip.  In addition, each mixing bowl comes with a non-slip base to prevent bowls from sliding around on the counter.  This non-slip base will also protect the countertops from damage such as scratching.

Lastly, this set of stainless steel mixing bowls is dishwasher safe.  And, they come in your choice of colors:  Candy Apple Red or Stainless Steel.

Pros:

The KitchenAid 3-Piece Stainless Steel Mixing Bowl Set, in our opinion, have the perfect array of sizes.  And, at a little over 4 pounds, they are a nice weight.    

Cons:

If you decide to go with the Candy Apple Red color, some consumers have complained the color chips off.

Furthermore, there have been complaints the edge of the rim is sharp and uncomfortable.

The Pampered Chef Stainless Steel Mixing Bowl Set of 3

The Pampered Chef Stainless Steel Mixing Bowl Set of 3

We are a huge fan of The Pampered Chef and this set of mixing bowls further validates our love for this company.  The Pampered Chef Stainless Steel Mixing Bowl Set offers the perfect solutions for all of our prepping issues.

First, this set of mixing bowls come with metric marks on the inside to get the precise measurement without dirtying a measuring cup.  Next, each bowl comes with a built-in, drip-free pour spout.  Finally, these bowls have a padded thumb hole to stabalize the bowls while you’re whisking away.  And, if you’re so inclined, you can use these thumb holes for hook storage.

The Pampered Chef Stainless Steel Mixing Bowl Set is made of high quality, brushed stainless steel.  This stainless steel is resistant to rust and corrosion.

Furthermore, these stainless steel mixing bowls have a silicone bottom for a slip-free prepping session.  In addition, this silicone bottom will help to protect the countertops from damage.

And, not only does this set come with a silicone bottom, but silicone lids as well.  This makes it easy to transport or refrigerate.

This set includes a 2 quart, 4 quart and 6 quart mixing bowl.  They are dishwasher safe, refrigerator safe and freezer safe.

Pros:

What can we say?  There are a lot of positives to this set of stainless steel mixing bowls.  From the pour spout, to the thumb/storage holes, to the silicone bottom, and of course, the silicone lids.

Cons:

Some consumers have complained the lids tend to pop off.

In addition, the edges are a bit sharp and uncomfortable.

OXO Good Grips 3-Piece Stainless-Steel Mixing Bowl Set

OXO Good Grips 3-Piece Stainless-Steel Mixing Bowl Set

This pick for best mixing bowls is a great option for those who are undecided about whether to go with stainless steel or plastic.  The OXO Good Grips 3-Piece Stainless-Steel Mixing Bowl Set is made of quality, brushed stainless steel with a plastic exterior.  And, this plastic exterior is beneficial as it will help to protect the hands when dealing with hot foods.

This stainless steel mixing bowl set comes with a 1.5 quart, 3 quart and 5 quart bowls which nest inside of eachother for easy storing.  And, they are lightweight at 3.4 pounds.

Each bowl in the OXO Good Grips 3-Piece Stainless-Steel Mixing Bowl Set features a non-skid bottom for a slip-free prep session.  Furthermore, this non-skid bottom will help protect the counters from damage.

Finally, this set of stainless steel mixing bowls is dishwasher safe.

Pros:

The OXO Good Grips 3-Piece Stainless-Steel Mixing Bowl Set is sturdy and extremely durable.

In addition, because of the stainless steel interior and the plastic exterior, they retain heat well.  And, when dealing with heat, the plastic exterior is a great alternative to hot pads or oven mitts.  

Cons:

A couple of consumers have complained about rusting.  However, most consumers haven’t reported on this particular problem.  The best advice we could give is to make sure these bowls are completely dry before storing.

KUKPO Mixing Bowls

This pick for best mixing bowls is in the plastic category.  And, like we stated previously, this is BPA-free plastic.  So, this set of mixing bowls won’t be transferring chemicals onto your food.

The KUKPO Mixing Bowls come in 3 sizes:  1.8 quart, 3.6 quart and 6.5 quart.  And, these are nesting-style of bowls, so you can store them away convienently.

This set of mixing bowls feature “easy grip handles.”  These handles consist of non-slip rubber.  In addition, the base of these bowls offer a non-skid bottom to protect the countertops and to keep things steady while mixing.

And, perhaps one of our favorite features is the easy pour spout.  So, you can say goodbye to sloppy pouring with these bowls.  

Finally, the KUKPO Mixing Bowls are dishwasher and freezer safe.

Pros:

We love the pour spout and this features is one of our favorites of any mixing bowl.

In addition, these bowls are fairly deep which help to keep the food inside the bowl while mixing.  

Cons:

The bottom is rounded which makes them a bit unstable.  However, some cooks prefer the rounded bottoms better.

Furthermore, some consumers have complained these mixing bowls are not all that sturdy.

Bellemain Stainless Steel Non-Slip Mixing Bowls with Lids

Bellemain Stainless Steel Non-Slip Mixing Bowls with Lids

These mixing bowls are likely the most budget-friendly picks on our list.  However, the Bellemain Stainless Steel Non-Slip Mixing Bowls look anything but budget-friendly.

This set of 4 mixing bowls come in the following sizes:  1 quart, 1.5 quart, 3 quart and 5 quart.  And, these mixing bowls are lightweight at 3.9 pounds.

The Bellemain Stainless Steel Mixing Bowls are made of 18/10 stainless steel with silicone coating on the bottom.  This silicone coating is slip-resistant and will help protect the countertop from scratching.

In addition, this pick for best mixing bowls comes with BPA-free silicone lids.  This will help secure the food while you transport, refrigerate or freeze.

The Bellemain Mixing Bowls feature metric measurements on the inside of each bowl.  And, this will help maximize your time in the kitchen and prevent you from needlessly dirtying a measuring cup.

These mixing bowls are dishwasher safe and they are able to go in the oven at a maximum 390 degree temperature Fahrenheit.

Pros:

Lids, metric measurement, BPA-free, 18/10 stainless steel, oven-friendly…need we say more?  Oh, yes, we do!  These are also budget-friendly.  You can’t get much better than all of that.

Cons:

There is no convienent pour spout or functional edge that allows for a drip-free pour.

 

FINEDINE Stainless Steel Mixing Bowls

FINEDINE Stainless Steel Mixing Bowls

Our final pick for best mixing bowls come with a whopping 6 bowls in total.  The FINEDINE Stainless Steel Mixing Bowls comes with the following sizes:  .75 quart, 1.5 quart, 3 quart, 4 quart, 5 quart and 8 quart.

These mixing bowls are made with commercial-grade stainless steel that are rust and corrosion-resistant.

The FINEDINE Stainless Steel Mixing Bowls feature a wide rim for even pouring and a flat base to stabilize the bowls while mixing.

Finally, this set of mixing bowls can be stored in the refrigerator and freezer.  In addition, they are dishwasher-safe.

Pros:

You get a lot of bang for your buck with these mixing bowls.  In addition, they are extremely sturdy.

Cons:

They don’t have all the bells and whistles like some of our other picks.  There is no pour spout or non-slip base.

best massage chair pad

Best Massage Chair Pad Reviews

If you’re on the hunt for the best massage chair pad, you’ve come to the right place.  This is because we have been through our share of massage chair pads and have learned the hard way.

And while most of the massage chair pads we have owned have been of decent quality, they still didn’t do the job we needed them to do.  For instance, have you ever felt that little annoying knot in the right upper shoulder blade?  The massage chair pads we owned have all turned out to be duds when we found out they wouldn’t reach a certain area in our most desperate of times.

So, we began our search for the best massage chair pad with those “out of reach” areas in mind.  And, even if your pain is more in the center of your back and very reachable, you know once you purchase just any massage chair pad, an “out of reach” area is going to be calling for your attention.  Therefore, our first request was a massage chair pad that is all-encompassing.

best massage chair pad

Our next request is pressure.  We want a massager chair pad that not only claims to have a deep-kneading massage, they actually have a deep-kneading massage.

And, next up on our list is heat.  And, heat is important in order to loosen up the tension in the tissue and the muscles.  Furthermore, when you’re working with both heat and massage, you get the best results.

Finally, and our last request, is the best massage chair pad has to be quality.  And, with quality naturally comes durability.  We need our massage chair pad to handle our day-to-day stress without having it sputter out on us.

So, when we finally narrowed down the massage chair pads that met our expectations, we relied on consumer reviews and feedback to narrow down the top 4 best of the best massage chair pads on the market.

And, these picks for best massage chair pad all hit the spot.  In more ways than one.

 

Best Massage Chair Pad

 FeaturesType of MassagePrice
Naipo Back Massager Chair
Naipo
Back Massager Chair
8 Nodes
Adjustable Neck Pillow
Remote Control
AC Adapter
Foldable
Rolling
Kneading
Vibration
Compression
Heat
Casada QUATTROMED III with Jade Stone and Heating
Casada
QUATTROMED III with Jade Stone and Heating
Jade Massage Heads
Remote Control
AC Adapter
Car Adapter
Foldable
Rolling
Kneading
Vibration
Jade Stone
Heat
FITFIRST Massager Cushion
FITFIRST
Massager Cushion
6 Massage Balls
Remote Control
AC Adapter
Car Adapter
Foldable
Rolling
Kneading
Tapping
Heat
Zyllion ZMA14 Shiatsu Neck & Back Massager Cushion
Zyllion
ZMA14 Shiatsu Neck & Back Massager Cushion
8 Massage Nodes
Remote Control
AC Adapter
Foldable
Rolling
Kneading
Vibration
Heat

 

Best Massage Chair Pad

 

Naipo Back Massager Chair

Naipo Back Massager Chair

Our first pick for best massage chair pad gives a deep-kneading Shiatsu-style of massage.  This means, it gives a massage that will replicate a massage given by thumbs, hands, knuckles and even elbows.

The Naipo Back Massager Chair comes with 8 nodes that will reach the full back, including the “hard to reach” areas.  This includes the neck, shoulders and the upper, middle and lower back.  And, not only will it massage the whole back, this massage chair pad also massages the thighs and upper leg area.

This massage chair pad offers a vibration massage with 3 levels of intensity.  And, it includes a heat function which focuses on the back and neck area.

The Naipo Back Massager Chair features 4 different programs that can work simultaneously – and which can all be controlled by a remote.  These programs include rolling, kneading, vibration and heat.

Furthermore, this chair pad massager uses airbag technology to inflate the chair around the hips and waist for a compression massage.  Furthermore, this massager comes with an adjustable neck pillow to get you set up in the most comfortable position.

The Naipo Back Massager Chair has an AC adapter that plugs into an outlet.  In addition, to prevent overheating, it comes with a 20 minutes automatic shut off timer.

Finally, this massage chair pad folds down for easy storage and portability.

Pros:

The Naipo Back Massager Chair gets all the crevices in your back, even in the “hard to reach” areas.  In addition, it offers a spot function where you can focus on one particular area at a time.

Cons:

If you’re under 5’2 or over 6’0, this chair may not work for you.  You may want to go with another one of our picks.  

 

Casada QUATTROMED III with Jade Stone and Heating

Casada QUATTROMED III with Jade Stone and Heating

There are a couple of things that make this massage chair pad stand out.  First, the massage heads are made of jade stones.  So, when these stones heat up, the Casada QUATTROMED III offers a jade stone style of massage.

Additionally, this massage chair pad feels like the real deal.  It replicates hands and moves in a way that a massage therapist would.

The other aspect that makes this massage chair pad stand out is you can even use this massage chair pad in the car.  It comes equipped with an adapter so you can get a massage and commute home from work.  However, it is important to note it is not recommended to use while driving. 

The Casada QUATTROMED III allows for 5, 10, 15 and 20 minute massage increments with Jade Stone and Heating.  It is a multidirectional rolling and shiatsu massage chair which offers 3 selectable massage areas:  lumbar, upper back and neck area.  Furthermore, this massage chair pad has a vibration function and infrared heat in the seat area.

This massage chair pad allows you to choose which massage functions you would like to use, including spot treatment.  It also allows you to choose a demo program for an automatic massage.  And, this is all controlled via remote.

Pros:

This pick for best massage chair pad has amazing pressure and it feels like a real massage.  And, when the heat function is turned on, it replicates hot stones rolling down your back.

Furthermore, this massage chair pad is highly portable.  You can use it in a car, a camper and even a motor boat.

Cons:

The Casada QUATTROMED III can be too much pressure for some people.  You may try using it for 5 minute increments at a time or going with another option.

 

FITFIRST Shiatsu Massager Cushion Car Seat Massager

FITFIRST Shiatsu Massager Cushion Car Seat Massager

This is another option on our list that is car friendly.  The FITFIRST Massager Cushion Car Seat Massager comes with a car adapter so you can travel comfortably.

This massage chair pad offers a shiatsu-style of massage with 6 adjustable 3D massage balls.  It has 3 massage modes which offer shiatsu neck massage, kneading back massage and tapping back massage.  And, with these modes, you also have the option for heat button to get your muscles loosened up.

Furthermore, the FITFIRST Shiatsu Massager Cushion includes 3 intensity levels and a vibrating seat which will massage your glutes and thighs.  After 15 minutes, this massager will shut off automatically to protect the equipment from overheating. 

This massager cushion comes with a regular adapter and a car adapter.  In addition, it has a remote control so you can set the functions for your comfort.

The FITFIRST Massager Cushion is outfitted with high quality fabric and leather.  And, the cushion folds down for easy storage and portability.

Pros:

This massage chair pad is made with high quality materials down to the leather and fabric.  It gives a great massage with enough pressure to sooth tense muscles.

Furthermore, you can use it in the car.  Need we say more?

Cons:

The FITFIRST Massager Cushion is recommended for those between the heights of 5’2 and 6’0.  So, if you’re over or under those heights, you may want to try another option.

 

Zyllion ZMA14 Shiatsu Neck & Back Massager Cushion

Zyllion ZMA14 Shiatsu Neck & Back Massager Cushion

Our final pick for best massage chair pad offers a customizable massage where you can adjust the position of the rollers to suit your needs.  The Zyllion ZMA14 Shiatsu Neck & Back Massager Cushion offers a spot feature for a manual targeted massage or a massage in which the nodes will automatically travel up and down the spine.  Furthermore, you can set the width of the nodes to better suit your needs. 

This massage chair cushion has 2 massage functions:  rotating shiatsu-style massage or rolling massage.  In addition, there is an option for heat in the back area.

The Zyllion ZMA14 Shiatsu Neck & Back Massager Cushion has separate shiatsu-style massage nodes for the neck area, with a separate optional heat function.  There are 4 nodes in total that are fully customizable.  You can switch up the rotational direction or you have the option of allowing the nodes to massage up and down the neck.  And, you also have the option to use the direct target function to hit a particular spot in need.  This direct target function replicates what a hand held massager would do.      

Furthermore, the seat also has its own massage function with 3 levels of vibration massage.

Finally, this massage chair pad offers overheat protection after 20 minutes of use to protect the chair from overheating.

Pros:

The Zyllion ZMA14 Shiatsu Neck & Back Massager Cushion is a lot of bang for your buck.  You will receive the same functionality as other massage chair pads in higher budget categories.

In addition, this massage chair pad gives a deep, intensive massage.  It is great quality and durable.

Cons:

There is no adjustment for the headrest and the body of this massage chair is on the stiff side.  Furthermore, some consumers have complained the neck area is too tall to reach.  However, this may be great if you’re on the taller end of the spectrum.  But, it just goes to show you, that no matter which massage chair you go with, there isn’t a one size fits all solution.

Finally, a few consumers have stated the pressure is too much.  So, if you are on the sensitive side, use a lower intensity setting or you may want to go with another massage chair option.

best head massager

Best Head Massager and Scalp Relief

Whether you’re looking for the best head massager for headaches, scalp relief, stiffness or to increase scalp stimulation, we found 5 of the top head massagers on the market that have been proven to help many people relieve symptoms associated with pain in the cranium area.

And, since we all have different needs, we found an array of devices that each have their own specialities and personalities to help relieve some of these symptoms you may suffer from.

best head massager

So, if you’re looking for a device to help ease pain associated with migraines or vascular headaches, we have included, on our list, a head massager to ease this type of pain.  If you’re looking for scalp stimulation for hair regrowth, we have a couple of options on our list that will help increase blood flow and rejuvenate hair loss.

Additionally, if you’re looking for a head massager simply for relaxing or helping with sleep disorders, there is a great device on our list that’s an all-encompassing head massager designed not only for headaches, but for sleep aid as well.

And, our final picks for best head massager and scalp relief have been scrutinized and thoroughly reviewed to ensure the best head massagers on the market.  Additionally, through consumer reviews and feedback, these top 5 picks on the market have been proven to deliver relief to your cranium.

 

Best Head Massager and Scalp Relief

 FeaturesBest For...Price
Breo iScalp and Body Massager
Breo
iScalp and Body Massager
2 Speeds
Waterproof
Cordless
Rechargeable
4 Massage Heads
4 Brush Heads
Scalp Relief/Stimulation
Body Massage
NORLANYA Electric Head Massager KS-2800A
NORLANYA
Electric Head Massager KS-2800A
Adjustable
Remote Control
Deep Massage
Heat
Vibration
Music
Timer
USB/Battery Operated
Headache
Pain Relief
Relaxation
Sleep Aid
FITTOP Electric Scalp Massager
FITTOP
Electric Scalp Massager
2 Speeds
Waterproof
Cordless
Rechargeable
Silicone Massage Head
Headache
Scalp Relief/Stimulation
Body Massage
ETTGS Handheld Scalp Massager
ETTGS
Handheld Scalp Massager
4 Massage Heads
2 Directions
Cordless
Battery Powered
Scalp Relief/Stimulation
Body Massage
Tezam Head Massager
Tezam
Head Massager
8,500 Vibration/Min
Dual Action
Battery Operated
Headache
Scalp Relief/Stimulation

 

Best Head Massager

Breo iScalp and Body Massager

Breo iScalp and Body Massager

Our first pick for best head massager is a multi-faceted option that not only works for the head, it works for the whole body.  The Breo iScalp and Body Massager can be used on your scalp, head, neck, feet, legs, arms…just about anywhere that needs relief.  

And, not only can it be used anywhere on the body, it can practically be used anywhere you roam.  This head and body massager is waterproof, so feel free to use it in the shower or even the rain.

The Breo iScalp and Body Massager is cordless and rechargeable with a 2 to 3 hour charge time.  And, once charged, this massager will give you approximately 90 minutes of massage relief.  To charge, place it in the base connected via USB port or AC outlet, and before you know it, you will have a full charge in no time.

This head massager comes with 4 interchangeable massage heads that feature 7 nodes.  And, these nodes replicate the feeling of fingers.  Additionally, this head massager comes with 4 microfiber brush heads.  These massage heads all rotate both clockwise or counterclockwise and are adjustable via high and low speeds.

If that’s not enough, the Breo iScalp and Body Massager can also be used to scrub the face and the body.  Furthermore, this massager can be used with soap or shampoo.

Pros:

This head massager mimics the feeling of fingers which is the prefered method for scalp stimulation.  In addition, it is multifunctional and can be used all over the body or as a scrub brush.

Cons:

Some people may feel this gives too hard of a massage.  Furthermore, it has a slight buzzing sound which some may find annoying, especially for a head massager.

NORLANYA Electric Head Massager KS-2800A

NORLANYA Electric Head Massager KS-2800A

This pick is great for those who are looking to relieve headaches or for just general relaxing.  It is also designed to help with sleep disorders.

The NORLANYA Electric Head Massager KS-2800A functions as a helmet with 3 adjustable knobs to get the perfect fit.  And, once you have this helmet adjusted to your liking, you can control this head massager via remote control.  This remote control will allow you to adjust the programs, music, time and the on/off function.

This head massager comes with 4 different programs to choose from:  Deep Massage, Heat, Vibration and Music.  The Deep Massage function has 4 different settings that work as a compression type of massage – using air to massage and penetrate pressure points.  The Heat function has 2 settings that control the level of heat.  The heat is discharged in the back of the head, right above the neck.  The Vibration function has 10 different settings which you can increase or decrease the intensity of the vibration.  Finally, the Music function allows for 3 different options to choose from:  Alleviate Physical and Mental, Gentle Environment and Natural Sounds.

All of these programs can be timed in 5, 10 or 15 minute intervals.  Additionally, these functions can all work together simultaneously to give an all-encompassing massage.

The NORLANYA Electric Head Massager KS-2800A can be used via USB cord or can be used as a battery-operated device.  And, since it can be used with batteries, it is portable.  

Pros:

With so many functions, it would be hard to find a combination that didn’t cater to someone.  Furthermore, this pick for best head massager feels like the real deal.  So, if you want something that feels like a human’s touch, this is a fantastic choice for you.

Cons:

Some consumers have complained that the NORLANYA Electric Head Massager “squeezes” the head rather uncomfortably.  However, most consumers rave about how great of a massager this helmet gives.  

FITTOP Electric Scalp Massager

FITTOP Electric Scalp Massager

This pick for best head massager is for those who are looking to release pain and tension.  And, not only will it relieve pain and tension, it will also stimulate the scalp to get the blood flowing.  Therefore, this is also a great pick for those who are looking to stimulate hair growth.

The FITTOP Electric Scalp Massager is waterproof and portable.  So, feel free to use this in the shower, at the gym or even at work.  It comes with a rechargeable built-in lithium battery that’s capable of lasting for a week on a full charge.  In addition, the charging base is waterproof and comes equipped with a USB charging cable.  This whole setup also comes with a travel pouch to keep it all organized.

The FITTOP feels like the real deal.  It is contoured to fit the natural shape of your head with soft, silicone nodes that replicate the feeling of fingers.  Furthermore, and for your protection, these nodes are flexible and designed so they won’t grasp onto long hair.

This scalp massager replicates shiatsu-style of massage and offers an adjustable 2 speed control so you can increase or decrease tension as you please.

Pros:

The FITTOP Electric Scalp Massager delivers great pressure and can be used just about anywhere on the body.  It replicates a deeper massage which is great for relaxing the muscles.  Furthermore, the battery lasts a long time.  Under normal usage, it can last about a week.

Cons:

While most agree this head massager has great pressure, it can be a bit much for those who may be ultra sensitive.

ETTGS Handheld Scalp Massager

ETTGS Handheld Scalp Massager

This is a great budget option for a head and scalp massager.  The ETTGS Handheld Scalp Massager is small, lightweight, highly portable and at a reasonable price.

This head massager is battery-powered and comes with a base for easy storage.  It works simply by turning the indicator key to the on position.  And, to turn it off, simply turn the indicator key to the off position.

The ETTGS Handheld Scalp Massager comes with 4 massage heads with a total of 28 contact points.  It offers 2 directions of massage with moderate pressure.

Pros:

Like we mentioned previously, this massager is a great budget option.  Which makes it great for gentle scalp and head relief.  And, if you are just looking for something to stimulate the scalp but don’t want to break the bank, the ETTGS Handheld Scalp Massager should do the trick.

Cons:

And, with budget options, usually there is some sacrifice.  For instance, this scalp massager isn’t waterproof and doesn’t have the other bells and whistles some of our other options have.  This is as basic as you can get for a head massager.  Furthermore, if you’re looking for something more than light or moderate pressure, this may not be the best option for you.

Tezam Head Massager

Tezam Head Massager

Our final pick for best head massager and scalp relief is another budget option that is suitable for scalp stimulation and hair regrowth.  However, if you have mild head pain, this may do the trick to help relieve some tension.

The Tezam Head Massager works as a hand simulation massage, offering 8,500 micro vibrations per minute.  And, this head massager features dual motion with both tapping and vibration.  It is designed to replicate fingers with a 5-finger design.  

This head and scalp massager is lightweight and portable.  It is battery-operated and turns on with just a push of a button.  And, under normal operation, the batteries can last about 2 weeks.

Pros:  This is a great little head massager for increasing the blood flow to the scalp and for hair rejuvenation.  And, if you deal with mild tension of the scalp, this would work great at releasing the tension with continual usage.

Furthermore, if you find other head massagers to be a bit cumbersome and intense, this massager would be a great compromise for you.

Cons:  If you suffer from headaches or moderate to severe tension in the cranium, this may not be strong enough to help ease the pain.  Additionally, the Tezam Head Massager is not waterproof.  Although consumers have stated they use it on wet hair after getting out of the shower, it is not designed for moisture.

Also, this massager can be a little loud.  And, if you’re using it near the ears, it may get a bit annoying.